FC 300 Programming Guide

Contents

Introduction 3
Introduction 3
Approvals 3
Symbols 3
Abbreviations 4
Definitions 5
Safety Precautions 9

How to Programme 11
The Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panels 11
How to Programme on the Graphical LCP 11
The LCD-Display 12
Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Convert-
ers 14
Display Mode 16
Display Mode - Selection of Read-Outs 16
Parameter Set-Up 17
Quick Menu Key Functions 17
Main Menu Mode 20
Parameter Selection 20
Changing Data 20
Changing a Text Value 21
Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values 21
Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value 21
Changing a Data Value, Step-by-Step 22
Read-out and Programming of Indexed Parameters 22
How to Programme on the Numerical Local Control Panel 23
Local Control Keys 24
Initialisation to Default Settings 25
Parameter Selection - FC 300 26
Parameters: Operation and Display 27
Parameters: Load and Motor 37
Parameters: Brakes 52
Parameters: Reference/Ramps 56
Parameters: Limits/Warnings 67
Parameters: Digital In/Out 72
Parameters: Analog In/Out 86
Parameters: Controllers 92
Parameters: Communications and Options 96
Parameters: Profibus 101
Parameters: DeviceNet CAN Fieldbus 107
Parameters: Smart Logic Control 112
Parameters: Special Functions 125
Parameters: Drive Information 131
Parameters: Data Read-outs 138
Parameters: Encoder Input 145

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

FC 300 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists 148

Index 172

2 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide

Approvals

Symbols
Symbols used in this guide.

NB!
Indicates something to be noted by the reader.

Indicates a general warning.

Indicates a high-voltage warning.

* Indicates default setting

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 3

FC 300 Programming Guide
Introduction

Abbreviations
Alternating current AC
American wire gauge AWG
Ampere/AMP A
Automatic Motor Adaptation AMA
Current limit ILIM
Degrees Celcius °C
Direct current DC
Drive Dependent D-TYPE
Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC
Electronic Thermal Relay ETR
Frequency Converter FC
Gram g
Hertz Hz
Kilohertz kHz
Local Control Panel LCP
Meter m
Milli Henry Inductance mH
Milliampere mA
Millisecond ms
Minute min
Motion Control Tool MCT
Nanofarad nF
Newton Meters Nm
Nominal motor current IM,N
Nominal motor frequency fM,N
Nominal motor power PM,N
Nominal motor voltage UM,N
Parameter par.
Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV
Printed Circuit Board PCB
Rated Inverter Output Current IINV
Revolutions Per Minute RPM
Second s
Torque limit TLIM
Volts V

4 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
Introduction

Definitions
Drive:
D-TYPE
Size and type of the connected drive (dependencies).
IVLT,MAX
The maximum output current.
IVLT,N
The rated output current supplied by the frequency converter.
UVLT, MAX
The maximum output voltage.
Input: Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and
Control command Coasting stop, Quick-stop, DC
braking, Stop and the "Off" key.
You can start and stop the connected motor by Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing,
means of LCP and the digital inputs. Start reversing, Jog and Freeze
output
Functions are divided into two groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than
functions in group 2.

Motor:
fJOG
The motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via digital terminals).
fM
The motor frequency.
fMAX
The maximum motor frequency.
fMIN
The minimum motor frequency.
fM,N
The rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
IM
The motor current.
IM,N
The rated motor current (nameplate data).
M-TYPE
Size and type of the connected motor (dependencies).
nM,N
The rated motor speed (nameplate data).
PM,N
The rated motor power (nameplate data).
TM,N
The rated torque (motor).
UM
The instantaneous motor voltage.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 5

FC 300 Programming Guide
Introduction

UM,N
The rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
Break-away torque

ηVLT
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the ratio between the power output and the power
input.
Start-disable command
A stop command belonging to the group 1 control commands - see this group.
Stop command
See Control commands.
References:
Analog Reference
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be voltage or current.
Binary Reference
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port.
Preset Reference
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100% of the reference range. Selection of eight
preset references via the digital terminals.
Pulse Reference
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs (terminal 29 or 33).
RefMAX
Determines the relationship between the reference input at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20mA)
and the resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in par. 3-03.
RefMIN
Determines the relationship between the reference input at 0% value (typically 0V, 0mA, 4mA) and the
resulting reference. The minimum reference value set in par. 3-02.
Miscellaneous:
Analog Inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various functions of the frequency converter.
There are two types of analog inputs:
Current input, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA
Voltage input, 0-10 V DC (FC 301)
Voltage input, -10 - +10 V DC (FC 302).
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, or a digital signal.

6 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
Introduction

Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA

AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for the connected motor at standstill.
Brake Resistor
The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the brake power generated in regenerative braking.
This regenerative braking power increases the intermediate circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures
that the power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
CT Characteristics
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps and
cranes.
Digital Inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various functions of the frequency converter.
Digital Outputs
The drive features two Solid State outputs that can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
ETR
Electronic Thermal Relay is a thermal load calculation based on present load and time. Its purpose is to
estimate the motor temperature.

Hiperface®
Hiperface® is a registered trademark by Stegmann.
Initialising
If initialising is carried out (par. 14-22), the frequency converter returns to the default setting.
Intermittent Duty C ycle
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an
off-load period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non-periodic duty.
LCP
The Local Control Panel (LCP) makes up a complete interface for control and programming of the FC 300
Series. The control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 3 metres from the frequency converter,
i.e. in a front panel by means of the installation kit option.
lsb
Least significant bit.
msb
Most significant bit.
MCM
Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for cable cross-section. 1 MCM = 0.5067 mm2.
On-line/Off-line Parameters
Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately after the data value is changed. Changes to
off-line parameters are not activated until you enter [OK] on the LCP.
Process PID
The PID regulator maintains the desired speed, pressure, temperature, etc. by adjusting the output fre-
quency to match the varying load.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 7

FC 300 Programming Guide
Introduction

Pulse Input/Incremental Encoder

An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back information on motor speed. The encoder is
used in applications where great accuracy in speed control is required.
RCD
Residual Current Device.
Set-up
You can save parameter settings in four Set-ups. Change between the four parameter Set-ups and edit
one Set-up, while another Set-up is active.
SFAVM
Switching pattern called Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous Vector Modulation (par. 14-00).
Slip Compensation
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip by giving the frequency a supplement that fol-
lows the measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost constant..
Smart Logic Control (SLC)
The SLC is a sequence of user defined actions executed when the associated user defined events are
evaluated as true by the SLC. (Parameter group 13-xx).
FC Standard Bus
Includes RS 485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See parameter 8-30.
Thermistor:
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the temperature is to be monitored (frequency converter
or motor).
Trip
A state entered in fault situations, e.g. if the frequency converter is subject to an over-temperature or
when the frequency converter is protecting the motor, process or mechanism. Restart is prevented until
the cause of the fault has disappeared and the trip state is cancelled by activating reset or, in some cases,
by being programmed to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal safety.
Trip Locked
A state entered in fault situations when the frequency converter is protecting itself and requiring physical
intervention, e.g. if the frequency converter is subject to a short circuit on the output. A locked trip can
only be cancelled by cutting off mains, removing the cause of the fault, and reconnecting the frequency
converter. Restart is prevented until the trip state is cancelled by activating reset or, in some cases, by
being programmed to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal safety.
VT Characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.

VVCplus
If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control, Voltage Vector Control (VVCplus) improves the
dynamics and the stability, both when the speed reference is changed and in relation to the load torque.
60° AVM
Switching pattern called 60°Asynchronous Vector Modulation (par. 14-00).
Power Factor 3 x U x I 1 x cosϕ
Power factor =
The power factor is the relation between I1 and 3 x U x IRMS
IRMS.

The power factor for 3-phase control: I 1 x cosϕ1 I1

= = since cosϕ1 = 1
IRMS IRMS

8 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
Introduction

The power factor indicates to which extent the IRMS = I12 + I52 + I72 + .. + In2
frequency converter imposes a load on the mains
supply.
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for
the same kW performance.

In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different harmonic currents are low.
The FC 300 frequency converters' built-in DC coils produce a high power factor, which minimizes the
imposed load on the mains supply.
Safety Precautions

The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous whenever connected to mains. Incorrect
installation of the motor, frequency converter or fieldbus may cause damage to the equip-
ment, serious personal injury or death. Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well
as national and local rules and safety regulations, must be complied with.

Safety Regulations
1. The frequency converter must be disconnected from mains if repair work is to be carried out.
Check that the mains supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed
before removing motor and mains plugs.
2. The [STOP/RESET] key on the control panel of the frequency converter does not disconnect the
equipment from mains and is thus not to be used as a safety switch.
3. Correct protective earthing of the equipment must be established, the user must be protected
against supply voltage, and the motor must be protected against overload in accordance with
applicable national and local regulations.
4. The earth leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA.
5. Protection against motor overload is not included in the factory setting. If this function is desired,
set par. 1-90 to data value ETR trip or data value ETR warning.

NB!
The function is initialised at 1.16 x rated motor current and rated motor frequency. For the
North American market: The ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in ac-
cordance with NEC.

6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and mains supply while the frequency converter is con-
nected to mains. Check that the mains supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time
has passed before removing motor and mains plugs.
7. Please note that the frequency converter has more voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3, when load
sharing (linking of DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 V DC have been installed. Check that
all voltage inputs have been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before com-
mencing repair work.
Warning against Unintended Start
1. The motor can be brought to a stop by means of digital commands, bus commands, references
or a local stop, while the frequency converter is connected to mains. If personal safety consid-
erations make it necessary to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these stop functions are
not sufficient.
2. While parameters are being changed, the motor may start. Consequently, the stop key [STOP/
RESET] must always be activated; following which data can be modified.
3. A motor that has been stopped may start if faults occur in the electronics of the frequency con-
verter, or if a temporary overload or a fault in the supply mains or the motor connection ceases.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 9

FC 300 Programming Guide
Introduction

Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the equipment has been disconnected
from mains.

Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing
(linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for kinetic back up. Refer to FC 300
Operating Instructions (MG.33.A8.xx) for further safety guidelines.

10 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide

How to Programme

The Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panels

The easiest programming of FC 300 frequency converters is performed by the Graphical Local Control
Panel (LCP 102). It is necessary to consult FC 300 Design Guide when using Numeric Local Control Panel
(LCP 101).

How to Programme on the Graphical LCP

The following instructions are valid for the graphical LCP (LCP 102):
The control panel is divided into four functional
groups:
1. Graphical display with Status lines.
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between dis-
play functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights
(LEDs).
4. Operation keys and indicator lights
(LEDs).
All data is displayed in a graphical LCP display,
which can show up to five items of operating data
while displaying [Status].
Display lines:
a. Status line: Status messages displaying
icons and graphic.
b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying
data defined or chosen by the user. By
pressing the [Status] key, up to one extra
line can be added.
c. Status line: Status messages displaying
text.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 11

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

The LCD-Display
The LCD-display has back light and a total of 6 alpha-numeric lines. The display lines show the direction
of rotation (arrow), the chosen Set-up as well as the programming Set-up. The display is divided into 3
sections:

Top section shows up to 2 measurements in nor-

130BP074.10
mal operating status. Top section

The top line in the Middle section shows up to 5

measurements with related unit, regardless of
Middle section

status (except in the case of alarm/warning).

Bottom section
Bottom section always shows the state of the
frequency converter in Status mode.

The Active Set-up (selected as the Active Set-up in par. 0-10) is shown. When programming another Set-
up than the Active Set-up, the number of the programmed Set-up appears to the right.

Display Contrast Adjustment

Press [status] and [▴] for darker display
Press [status] and [▾] for brighter display
Most FC 300 parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via the control panel, unless a password
has been created via par. 0-60 Main Menu Password or via par. 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
Indicator lights (LEDs):
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or warning LED lights up. A status and alarm
text appear on the control panel.
The ON LED is activated when the frequency converter receives mains voltage or via a DC bus terminal
or 24 V external supply. At the same time, the back light is on.

• Green LED/On: Control section is work-

ing.
• Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
• Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an
alarm.
130BP040.10

LCP keys
The control keys are divided into functions. The
keys below the display and indicator lamps are
used for parameter Set-up, including choice of
display indication during normal operation. 130BP045.10

[Status] indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the motor. You can choose between 3
different readouts by pressing the [Status] key:
5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic Control.

12 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Use [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for changing back to Display mode from either the
Quick Menu mode, the Main Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also use the [Status] key to toggle single or
double read-out mode.
[Quick Menu] allows quick access to different Quick Menus such as:
- My Personal Menu
- Quick Set-up
- Changes Made
- Loggings
Use [Quick Menu] for programming the parameters belonging to the Quick Menu. It is possible to switch
directly between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
[Main Menu] is used for programming all parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode and Quick Menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The pa-
rameter shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.
[Alarm Log] displays an Alarm list of the five latest alarms (numbered A1-A5). To obtain additional
details about an alarm, use the arrow keys to manoeuvre to the alarm number and press [OK]. You will
now receive information about the condition of your frequency converter right before entering the alarm
mode.

[Back] takes you to the previous step or layer in the navigation structure.
[Cancel] annuls your last change or command as long as the display has not been changed.
[Info] supplies information about a command,
parameter, or function in any display window. [In-
fo] provides detailed information whenever help is
needed.
Exit info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back],
or [Cancel].

Navigation Keys
The four navigation arrows are used to navigate between the different choices available in [Quick
Menu], [Main Menu] and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor.
[OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter.

Local Control Key for local control are found at

the bottom of the control panel.

130BP046.10

[Hand On] enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP. [Hand on] also starts the motor, and
it is now possible to enter the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can be selected as
Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-40 [Hand on] key on LCP.
External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a “start” command
via the LCP.
The following control signals will still be active when [Hand on] is activated:
• [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto on]

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 13

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

• Reset
• Coasting stop inverse
• Reversing
• Set-up select bit 0- Set-up select bit 1
• Stop command from serial communication
• Quick stop
• DC brake
[Off] stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-41 [Off]
key on LCP. If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive the motor can be stopped
by disconnecting the voltage.
[Auto On] enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial com-
munication. When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the frequency
converter will start. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-42 [Auto on] key on
LCP.

NB!
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control
keys [Hand on] – [Auto on].

[Reset] is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm (trip). It can be selected as Ena-
ble [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-43 Reset Keys on LCP.
The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The
parameter shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.
Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings be-
tween Multiple Frequency Converters

Once the set-up of a frequency converter is com-

plete, we recommend that you store the data in
the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up Software
Tool.

Data storage in LCP:

1. Go to par. 0-50 LCP Copy
2. Press the [OK] key
3. Select “All to LCP”
4. Press the [OK] key
All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached,
press [OK].

14 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

NB!
Stop the motor before performing this operation.

You can now connect the LCP to another frequency converter and copy the parameter settings to this
frequency converter as well.
Data transfer from LCP to frequency converter:
1. Go to par. 0-50 LCP Copy
2. Press the [OK] key
3. Select “All from LCP”
4. Press the [OK] key
The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].

NB!
Stop the motor before performing this operation.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 15

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Display Mode
In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables can be indicated continuously in the middle
section: 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 as well as 2 and 3.
Display Mode - Selection of Read-Outs Operating variable: Unit:
It is possible to toggle between three status read- Par. 16-00 Control Word hex
Par. 16-01 Reference [unit]
out screens by pressing the [Status] key. Par. 16-02 Reference %
Operating variables with different formatting are Par. 16-03 Status Word hex
Par. 16-05 Main Actual Value %
shown in each status screen - see below. Par. 16-10 Power [kW]
Par. 16-11 Power [HP]
The table shows the measurements you can link Par. 16-12 Motor Voltage [V]
Par. 16-13 Frequency [Hz]
to each of the operating variables. Define the links Par. 16-14 Motor Current [A]
via par. 0-20, 0-21, 0-22, 0-23, and 0-24. Par. 16-16 Torque Nm
Par. 16-17 Speed [RPM]
Each readout parameter selected in par. 0-20 to Par. 16-18 Motor Thermal %
Par. 16-20 Motor Angle
par. 0-24 has its own scale and digits after a pos- Par. 16-30 DC Link Voltage V
sible decimal point. By larger numeric value of a Par. 16-32 Brake Energy / s kW
Par. 16-33 Brake Energy / 2 min kW
parameter fewer digits are displayed after the Par. 16-34 Heatsink Temp. C
decimal point. Par. 16-35 Inverter Thermal %
Par. 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current A
Ex.: Current readout Par. 16-37 Inv. Max. Current A
Par. 16-38 SL Control State
5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A. Par. 16-39 Control Card Temp. C
Par. 16-40 Logging Buffer Full
Par. 16-50 External Reference
Par. 16-51 Pulse Reference
Par. 16-52 Feedback [Unit]
Par. 16-53 Digi Pot Reference
Par. 16-60 Digital Input bin
Par. 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting V
Par. 16-62 Analog Input 53
Par. 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting V
Par. 16-64 Analog Input 54
Par. 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
Par. 16-66 Digital Output [bin]
Par. 16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
Par. 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Par. 16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Par. 16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
Par. 16-71 Relay Output
Par. 16-72 Counter A
Par. 16-73 Counter B
Par. 16-80 Fieldbus CTW hex
Par. 16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 hex
Par. 16-84 Comm. Option STW hex
Par. 16-85 FC Port CTW 1 hex
Par. 16-86 FC Port REF 1 hex
Par. 16-90 Alarm Word
Par. 16-92 Warning Word
Par. 16-94 Ext. Status Word

Status screen I:
130BP041.10

This read-out state is standard after start-up or

initialization.
1.1
Use [INFO] to obtain information about the meas-
urement links to the displayed operating variables
1.2
(1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2 and 3).
See the operating variables shown in the screen
2
in this illustration.
3 1.3

16 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Status screen II:

130BP062.10
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 2)
shown in the screen in this illustration.
In the example, Speed, Motor current, Motor pow-
er and Frequency are selected as variables in the
first and second. 1.3
1.1

1.2

Status screen III:

130BP063.10
This state displays the event and action of the
Smart Logic Control. For further information, see
section Smart Logic Control.

Parameter Set-Up
The FC 300 Series can be used for practically all assignments, which is why the number of parameters is
quite large. The series offers a choice between two programming modes - a Main Menu and a Quick Menu
mode.
The former provides access to all parameters. The latter takes the user through a few parameters making
it possible to start operating the frequency converter.
Regardless of the mode of programming, you can change a parameter both in the Main Menu mode and
in the Quick Menu mode.
Quick Menu Key Functions
Pressing [Quick Menus] The list indicates the dif-
ferent areas contained in the Quick menu.
Select My Personal Menu to display the chosen
personal parameters. These parameters are se-
lected in par. 0-25 Personal Menu. Up to 20 dif-
ferent parameters can be added in this menu.

Select Quick setup to go through a limited amount of parameters to get the motor running almost opti-
mally. The default setting for the other parameters considers the desired control functions and the
configuration of signal inputs/outputs (control terminals).
The selection of parameter is effected by means of the arrow keys. The parameters in the following table
are accessible.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 17

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameter Designation Setting

0-01 Language
1-20 Motor Power [kW]
1-22 Motor Voltage [V]
1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz]
1-24 Motor Current [A]
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [rpm]
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No function*
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable complete AMA
3-02 Min Reference [rpm]
3-03 Max Reference [rpm]
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time [sec]
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time [sec]
3-13 Reference Site

* If terminal 27 is set to “no function”, no connection to +24 V on terminal 27 is necessary.

Select Changes made to get information about: Select Loggings to get information about the dis-
• the last 10 changes. Use the [▴] [▾] nav- play line read-outs. The information is shown as
graphs.
igation keys to scroll between the last 10
Only display parameters selected in par. 0-20 and
changed parameters.
par. 0-24 can be viewed. It is possible to store up
• the changes made since default setting. to 120 samples in the memory for later reference.

18 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Initial Commissioning
The easiest way of doing the initial commissioning is by using the Quick Menu button and follow the quick
set-up procedure using LCP 102 (read table from left to right):

Press

Q2 Quick Menu

0-01 Language Set language

1-20 Motor power Set Motor nameplate power

1-22 Motor voltage Set Nameplate voltage

1-23 Motor frequency Set Nameplate frequency

1-24 Motor current Set Nameplate current

1-25 Motor nominal speed Set Nameplate speed in RPM

If terminal default is Coast inverse it is pos-

5-12 Terminal 27 Digital In- sible to change this setting to No function.
put No connection to terminal 27 is then needed
for running AMA
1-29 Automatic Motor Adap- Set desired AMA function. Enable complete
tation AMA is recommended

3-02 Minimum reference Set the minimum speed of the motor shaft

3-03 Maximum reference Set the maximum speed of the motor shaft

Set the ramping up time with reference to

3-41 Ramp1 up time
nominal motor speed (set in par. 1-25)

Set the ramping down time with reference to

3-42 Ramp1 down time
nominal motor speed (set in par. 1-25)

Set the site from where the reference must

3-13 Reference site
work

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 19

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Main Menu Mode

Start the Main Menu mode by pressing the [Main

130BP066.10
Menu] key. The read-out shown to the right ap-
pears on the display.
The middle and bottom sections on the display
show a list of parameter groups which can be
chosen by toggling the up and down buttons.

Each parameter has a name and number which remain the same regardless of the programming mode.
In the Main Menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The first digit of the parameter number
(from the left) indicates the parameter group number.
All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu. However, depending on the choice of configuration
(par. 1-00), some parameters can be "missing". E.g. open loop hides all the PID parameters, and other
enabled options make more parameter groups visible.
Parameter Selection

In the Main menu mode, the parameters are divi- Group no. Parameter group:
ded into groups. You select a parameter group by 0 Operation/Display
1 Load/Motor
means of the navigation keys. 2 Brakes
The following parameter groups are accessible: 3 References/Ramps
4 Limits/Warnings
5 Digital In/Out
6 Analog In/Out
7 Controls
8 Comm. and Options
9 Profibus
10 CAN Fieldbus
11 Reserved Com. 1
12 Reserved Com. 2
13 Smart Logic
14 Special Functions
15 Drive Information
16 Data Readouts
17 Motor Feedb. Option

After selecting a parameter group, choose a pa-

130BP067.10

rameter by means of the navigation keys.

The middle section on the display shows the pa-
rameter number and name as well as the selected
parameter value.

Changing Data
The procedure for changing data is the same whether you select a parameter in the Quick menu or the
Main menu mode. Press [OK] to change the selected parameter.
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the selected parameter represents a numerical
data value or a text value.

20 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Changing a Text Value

If the selected parameter is a text value, change

130BP068.10
the text value by means of the [▴] [▾] navigation
keys.
The up key increases the value, and the down key
decreases the value. Place the cursor on the value
you want to save and press [OK].

Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values

130BP069.10
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric da-
ta value, change the chosen data value by means
of the [◂] [▸] navigation keys as well as the [▴]
[▾] navigation keys. Use the [◂] [▸] navigation
keys to move the cursor horizontally.

Use the [▴] [▾] navigation keys to change the data

130BP070.10
value. The up key enlarges the data value, and the
down key reduces the data value. Place the cursor
on the value you want to save and press [OK].

Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data

130BP073.10

Value
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric da-
ta value, select a digit by means of the [◂] [▸]
navigation keys.

Change the selected digit infinitely variably by

130BP072.10

means of the [▴] [▾] navigation keys.

The chosen digit is indicated by the cursor. Place
the cursor on the digit you want to save and press
[OK].

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 21

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Changing a Data Value, Step-by-Step

Certain parameters can be changed step by step or infinitely variably. This applies to Motor Power (par.
1-20), Motor Voltage (par. 1-22) and Motor Frequency (par. 1-23).
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric data values and as numeric data values infinitely
variably.
Read-out and Programming of Indexed Parameters
Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
Par. 15-30 to 15-32 contain a fault log which can be read out. Choose a parameter, press [OK], and use
the [▴] [▾] navigation keys to scroll through the value log.
Use par. 3-10 as another example:
Choose the parameter, press [OK], and use the [▴] [▾] navigation keys to scroll through the indexed
values. To change the parameter value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the value by
using the [▴] [▾] keys. Press [OK] to accept the new setting. Press [CANCEL] to abort. Press [Back] to
leave the parameter.

22 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

How to Programme on the Numerical Local Control Panel

The following instructions are valid for the Numer-
ical LCP (LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into four functional
groups:
1. Numerical display.
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between dis-
play functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights
(LEDs).
4. Operation keys and indicator lights
(LEDs).
Display line:
Status line: Status messages displaying icons
and numeric value.
Indicator lights (LEDs):
• Green LED/On: Indicates if control section
is on.
• Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning.
• Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an
alarm.
LCP keys
[Menu] Select one of the following modes:
• Status
• Quick Setup
• Main Menu

Status Mode: Displays the status of the frequen-

130BP077.10

cy converter or the motor.

If an alarm occurs the NLCP automatically
switches to status mode.
A number of alarms can be displayed.
130BP078.10

NB!
Parameter copy is not possible with
LCP 101 Numerical Local Control Pan-
el.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 23

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Main Menu/ Quick Setup is used for program-

130BP079.10
ming all parameters or only the parameters in the
Quick Meny (see also description of the LCP 102
earlier in this chapter).
The parameter values can be changed using the
[▴] [▾] keys when the value is flashing.
Select Main Menu by pressing [Menu] key a num-
ber of times.
Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press
[OK]
Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK]
If the parameter is an array parameter select the
array number and press [OK]
Select the wanted data value and press [OK]
Parameters with functional choices display values
such as [1], [2], etc. For a description of the dif-
ferent choices, see the individual description of
the parameters in the Parameter Selection section
[Back] for stepping backwards
Arrow [▴] [▾] keys are used for manoeuvring
between commands and within parameters.

Local Control Keys

Keys for local control are found at the bottom of
the control panel.

130BP046.10

[Hand on] enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP. [Hand on] also starts the motor and
it is now possible to enter the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can be selected as
Enable [1] og Disable [0] via par. 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a 'start' command
via the LCP.
The following control signals will still be active when [Hand on] is activated:
• [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto on]
• Reset
• Coasting stop inverse
• Reversing
• Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
• Stop command from serial communication
• Quick stop
• DC brake
[Off] stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-41
[Off] Key on LCP.

24 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive the motor can be stopped by discon-
necting the voltage.
[Auto on] enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial com-
munication. When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the frequency
converter will start. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-42 [Auto on] Key on
LCP.

NB!
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control
keys [Hand on] [Auto on].

[Reset] is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm (trip). It can be selected as Enable
[1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-43 Reset Keys on LCP.
Initialisation to Default Settings
Initialise the frequency converter to default settings in two ways:
Recommended initialisation (via par. 14-22)
1. Select par. 14-22 Par. 14-22 initialises all except:
14-50 RFI 1
2. Press [OK] 8-30 Protocol
8-31 Address
3. Select “Initialisation” 8-32 Baud Rate
8-35 Minimum Response Delay
4. Press [OK] 8-36 Max Response Delay
8-37 Max Inter-char Delay
5. Cut off the mains supply and wait until the 15-00 to 15-05 Operating data
15-20 to 15-22 Historic log
display turns off. 15-30 to 15-32 Fault log
6. Reconnect the mains supply - the fre-
quency converter is now reset.

Manual initialisation
1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the This parameter initialises all except:
display turns off. 15-00 Operating Hours
2a. Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the 15-03 Power-up's
same time while power up for LCP 102, 15-04 Over temp's
15-05 Over volt's
Graphical Display
2b. Press [Menu] while power up for LCP 101,
Numerical Display
3. Release the keys after 5 s.
4. The frequency converter is now program-
med according to default settings.

NB!
When you carry out manual initialisation, you also reset serial communication, RFI filter set-
tings (par. 14-50) and fault log settings.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 25

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameter Selection
Parameters for FC 300 are grouped into various parameter groups for easy selection of the correct pa-
rameters for optimized operation of the frequency converter.
0-xx Operation and Display parameters
• Basic Settings, set-up handling
• Display and Local Control Panel parameters for choosing readouts, setting up selections and
copying functions
1-xx Load and Motor parameters includes all load and motor related parameters
2-xx Brake parameters
• DC brake
• Dynamic brake (Resistor brake)
• Mechanical brake
• Over Voltage Control
3-xx References and ramping parameters includes DigiPot function
4-xx Limits Warnings; setting of limits and warning parameters
5-xx Digital inputs and outputs includes relay controls
6-xx Analog inputs and outputs
7-xx Controls; Setting parameters for speed and process controls
8-xx Communication and option parameters for setting of FC RS485 and FC USB port parameters.
9-xx Profibus parameters
10-xx DeviceNet and CAN Fieldbus parameters
13-xx Smart Logic Control parameters
14-xx Special function parameters
15-xx Drive information parameters
16-xx Read out parameters
17-xx Encoder Option parameters

26 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Operation and are included in all packages. English cannot be

Display erased or manipulated.
Language package 1 consists of:
0-0* Operation / Display English, German, French, Danish, Dutch, Spanish,
Parameters related to the fundamental functions Swedish, Italian and Finnish.
of the frequency converter, function of the LCP Language package 2 consists of:
buttons and configuration of the LCP display. English, German, Chinese, Korean, Japanese,
0-0* Basic Settings Thai, Traditional Chinese and Bahasa Indonesian.
Parameter group for basic frequency converter Language package 3 consists of:
settings. English, German, Slovenian, Bulgarian, Serbian,
Romanian, Hungarian, Czech and Russian.
0-01 Language
Language package 4 consists of:
Value: English, German, Spanish, English US, Greek,
English (English) [0] Brazilian Portuguese, Turkish and Polish.
German (Deutsch) [1]
French (Francais) [2]
Danish (Dansk) [3] 0-02 Motor Speed Unit

Spanish (Español) [4] Value:

Italian (Italiano) [5] RPM [0]

Swedish (Svenska) [6] Hz [1]

Dutch (Nederlands) [7]

Function:
Chinese (中文) [10] Select display of motor speed variables and pa-
Finnish (Suomi) [20] rameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
English US (English US) [22] terms of motor speed (RPM) or output frequency
Greek (ελληνικά) [27] to the motor (Hz). This parameter cannot be ad-
Portuguese (Português) [28] justed while the motor is running.
The display showing depends on choices made in
Slovenian (Slovenščina) [36]
parameter 0-02 and 0-03. The default setting of
Korean (한국어) [39]
parameters 0-02 and 0-03 depends on which re-
Japanese (日本語) [40] gion of the world the frequency converter is sup-
Turkish (Türkçe) [41] plied to but can be re-programmed as required.
Traditional Chinese (國語) [42] NB!
Bulgarian (Български) [43] Changing the Motor Speed Unit will re-
Serbian (Srpski) [44] set certain parameters to their initial
Romanian (Română) [45] value. It is recommended to select the
Hungarian (Magyar) [46] motor speed unit first, before modify-
ing other parameters.
Czech (Česky) [47]
Polish (Polski) [48]
Russian (Русский) [49]
Thai (ไทย) [50]
Bahasa Indonesian (Bahasa Indonesia) [51]

Function:
Defines the language to be used in the display.
The frequency converter can be delivered with 4
different language packages. English and German

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 27

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

setup (e.g. motor 1 for horizontal movement) and

0-03 Regional Settings another control scheme in another setup (e.g.
Value: motor 2 for vertical movement). Alternatively
International [0] they can be used by an OEM machine builder to
US [1] identically program all their factory fitted frequen-
cy converters for different machine types within a
Function: range to have the same parameters and then dur-
Select International [0] to set par.1-20 Motor ing production/commissioning simply select a
Power units to kW and the default value of par. specific setup depending on which machine the
1-23 Motor Frequency to 50 Hz. Select US [1] to frequency converter is installed on.
set par.1-21 Motor Power units to HP and the de- The active setup (i.e. the setup in which the fre-
fault value of par. 1-23 Motor Frequency to 60 Hz. quency converter is currently operating) can be
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- selected in parameter 0-10 and is displayed in the
tor is running. LCP. Using Multi set-up it is possible to switch be-
tween setups with the frequency converter run-
ning or stopped, via digital input or serial commu-
Operating State at Power-up nication commands. If it is necessary to change
0-04
(Hand) setups whilst running, ensure parameter 0-12 is
Value: programmed as required. Using parameter 0-11 it
Resume [0] is possible to edit parameters within any of the
setups whilst continuing the frequency converter
Forced stop, ref=old [1]
operation in its Active Setup which can be a dif-
Forced stop, ref = 0 [2]
ferent setup to that being edited. Using parameter
0-51 it is possible to copy parameter settings be-
Function:
tween the setups to enable quicker commissioning
Select theoperating mode upon reconnection of
if similar parameter settings are required in dif-
the frequency converter to mains voltage after
ferent setups.
power down in Hand (local) operation mode.
SelectResume [0] to restart the frequency con-
0-10 Active Set-up
verter maintaining the samelocal reference and
the same start/stop settings (applied by [START/ Value:
STOP]) as before the frequency converter was Factory setup [0]
powered down. Set-up 1 [1]
Select Forced stop, use saved reference [1] to re- Set-up 2 [2]
start the frequency converter with a saved local Set-up 3 [3]
reference, after mains voltage reappears and af-
Set-up 4 [4]
ter pressing [START].
Multi set-up [9]
Select Forced stop, set reference to 0 [2] to reset
the local reference to 0 upon restarting the fre-
Function:
quency converter.
Select the set-up to control the frequency con-
verter functions.
0-1* Set-up Operations Factory Set-up [0] cannot be changed. It contains
Define and control the individual parameter set- the Danfoss data set, and can be used as a data
ups. source when returning the other set-ups to a
The frequency converter has four parameter set- known state.
ups that can be programmed independently of Set-up 1 [1] to Set-up 4 [4] are the four separate
each other. This makes the frequency converter parameter set-ups within which all parameters
very flexible and able to solve advanced control can be programmed.
functionality problems, often saving the cost of Select Multi Set-up [9] for remote selection of set-
external control equipment. For example these ups using digital inputs and the serial communi-
can be used to program the frequency converter cation port. This set-up uses the settings from
to operate according to one control scheme in one

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

28 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

par. 0-12 'This option linked to'. Stop the frequen-

cy converter before making changes to open- and
closed loop functions.
Use par. 0-51 Set-up copy to copy a set-up to one
or all other set-ups. Stop the frequency converter
before switching between set-ups where parame-
ters marked ‘not changeable during operation’
have different values. To avoid conflicting settings
of the same parameter within two different set-
ups, link the set-ups together using par. 0-12 This
set-up linked to. Parameters which are ‘not
changeable during operation’ are marked FALSE
in the parameter lists in the section Parameter
Lists.

0-11 Edit Set-up

Value:
Factory setup [0]
Set-up 1 [1]
Set-up 2 [2]
Set-up 3 [3]
Set-up 4 [4]
Active Set-up [9]
0-12 This Set-up Linked to
Function:
Value:
Select the set-up to be edited (i.e. programmed)
Not linked [0]
during operation; either the active set-up or one
of the inactive set-ups. Set-up 1 [1]
Factory set-up [0] cannot be edited but it is useful Set-up 2 [2]
as a data source to return the other set-ups to a Set-up 3 [3]
known state. Set-up 1 [1] to Set-up 4 [4] can be Set-up 4 [4]
edited freely during operation, independently of
the active set-up. The Active set-up [9] can also Function:
be edited during operation. Edit the chosen set-up To enable conflict-free changes from one set-up to
from a range of sources: LCP, FC RS485, FC USB another during operation, link set-ups containing
or up to five fieldbus sites. parameters which are not changeable during op-
eration. The link will ensure synchronising of the
‘not changeable during operation’ parameter val-
ues when moving from one set-up to another dur-
ing operation. ‘Not changeable during operation’
parameters can be identified by the label FALSE in
the parameter lists in the section Parameter
Lists.
The par. 0-12 link set-up feature is used by Multi
set-up in par. 0-10 Active Set-up. Multi set-up is
used to move from one set-up to another during
operation (i.e. while the motor is running).
Example:

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 29

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Set-up

2 whilst the motor is running. Programme in Set- 0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups
up 1 first, then ensure that Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 Array [5]
are synchronised (or ‘linked’). Synchronisation
can be performed in two ways: Value:
1. Change the edit set-up to Set-up 2 [2] in par. 0 - 255 0
0-11 Edit Set-up and set par. 0-12 This Set-up
Function:
Linked to to Set-up 1 [1]. This will start the linking
View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of
(synchronising) process.
par. 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter
has one index for each parameter set-up. The pa-

130BP075.10
rameter value displayed for each index represents
which setups are linked to that parameter setup.

Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are

linked
Index LCP value
OR 0 {0}
1 {1,2}
2. While still in Set-up 1, copy Set-up 1 to Set-up
2 {1,2}
2. Then set par. 0-12 to Set-up 2 [2]. This will
3 {3}
start the linking process.
4 {4}
130BP076.10

0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel

Value:
0 - FFF.FFF.FFF 0
Function:
View the setting of par. 0-11 Edit Set-up for each
of the four different communication channels.
When the number is displayed in hex, as it is in
After the link is complete, par. 0-13 Readout: the LCP, each number represents one channel.
Linked Set-ups will read {1,2} to indicate that all Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number; ‘F’
‘not changeable during operation’ parameters are means factory setting; and ‘A’ means active set-
now the same in Set-up 1 and Set-up 2. If there up. The channels are, from right to left: LCP, FC-
are changes to a ‘not changeable during opera- bus, USB, HPFB1-5.
tion’ parameter, e.g. par 1-30 Stator Resistance Example: The number AAAAAA21h means that
(Rs), in Set-up 2, they will also be changed auto- the FC bus selected Set-up 2 in par. 0-11, the LCP
matically in Set-up 1. A switch between Set-up 1 selected Set-up 1 and all others used the active
and Set-up 2 during operation is now possible. set-up.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

30 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

0-2* LCP Display FC Port REF 1 [1686]

Alarm Word [1690]
Define the variables displayed in the Graphical Lo-
Alarm Word 2 [1691]
cal Control Panel. Warning Word [1692]
None [0] Warning Word 2 [1693]
Profibus Warning Word [953] Ext. Status Word [1694]
Readout Transmit Error Counter [1005] Ext. Status Word 2 [1695]
Readout Receive Error Counter [1006] PCD 1 Write to MCO [3401]
Readout Bus Off Counter [1007] PCD 2 Write to MCO [3402]
Warning Parameter [1013] PCD 3 Write to MCO [3403]
Running Hours [1501] PCD 4 Write to MCO [3404]
kWh Counter [1502] PCD 5 Write to MCO [3405]
Control Word [1600] PCD 6 Write to MCO [3406]
Reference [Unit] [1601] PCD 7 Write to MCO [3407]
Reference % [1602] PCD 8 Write to MCO [3408]
Status Word [1603] PCD 9 Write to MCO [3409]
Main Actual Value [%] [1605] PCD 10 Write to MCO [3410]
Custom Readout [1609] PCD 1 Read from MCO [3421]
Power [kW] [1610] PCD 2 Read from MCO [3422]
Power [hp] [1611] PCD 3 Read from MCO [3423]
Motor Voltage [1612] PCD 4 Read from MCO [3424]
Frequency [1613] PCD 5 Read from MCO [3425]
Motor Current [1614] PCD 6 Read from MCO [3426]
Frequency [%] [1615] PCD 7 Read from MCO [3427]
Torque [1616] PCD 8 Read from MCO [3428]
* Speed [RPM] [1617] PCD 9 Read from MCO [3429]
Motor Thermal [1618] PCD 10 Read from MCO [3430]
KTY Sensor Temperature [1619] Digital Inputs [3440]
Motor Angle [1620] Digital Outputs [3441]
Phase Angle [1621] Actual Position [3450]
Torque % [1622] Commanded Position [3451]
DC Link Voltage [1630] Actual Master Position [3452]
BrakeEnergy/s [1632] Slave Index Position [3453]
BrakeEnergy/2 min [1633] Master Index Position [3454]
Heatsink Temp. [1634] Curve Position [3455]
Inverter Thermal [1635] Track Error [3456]
Inv. Nom. Current [1636] Synchronizing Error [3457]
Inv. Max. Current [1637] Actual Velocity [3458]
SL Control State [1638] Actual Master Velocity [3459]
Control Card Temp. [1639] Synchronizing Status [3460]
External Reference [1650] Axis Status [3461]
Pulse Reference [1651] Program Status [3462]
Feedback [Unit] [1652] Idle Time [9913]
Digi Pot Reference [1653] Paramdb Requests in Queue [9914]
Digital Input [1660] Analog input X30/11 [1675]
Terminal 53 Switch Setting [1661] Analog input X30/12 [1676]
Analog Input 53 [1662] Analog output X30/8 mA [1677]
Terminal 54 Switch Setting [1663]
Analog Input 54 [1664] Function:
Analog Output 42 [mA] [1665] Select a variable for display in line 1, left position.
Digital Output [bin] [1666] None [0] No display value selected.
Freq. Input #29 [Hz] [1667]
Freq. Input #33 [Hz] [1668] Control Word [1600] Present control word
Pulse Output #27 [Hz] [1669] Reference [Unit] [1601] Total reference (sum of
Pulse Output #29 [Hz] [1670] digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up
Relay Output [bin] [1671] and slow-down) in selected unit.
Counter A [1672]
Reference % [1602] Total reference (sum of dig-
Counter B [1673]
Prec. Stop Counter [1674] ital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and
Fieldbus CTW 1 [1680] slow-down) in percent.
Fieldbus REF 1 [1682] Status Word [binary] [1603] Present status word.
Comm. Option STW [1684]
FC Port CTW 1 [1685]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 31

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Main actual value [1605] [Hex] One or more Feedback [Unit] [1652] Reference value from pro-
warnings in a Hex code. grammed digital input(s).
Power [kW] [1610] Actual power consumed by the Digital Input [1660] Signal states form the 6 dig-
motor in kW. ital terminals (18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33). Input
Power [hp] [1611] Actual power consumed by the 18 corresponds to the bit at the far left. Signal low
motor in HP. = 0; Signal high = 1.
Motor Voltage [V] [1612] Voltage supplied to the Terminal 53 Switch Setting [1661] Setting of in-
motor. put terminal 54. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
Frequency [Hz] [1613] Motor frequency, i.e. the Analog Input 53 [1662] Actual value at input 53
output frequency from the frequency converter in either as a reference or protection value.
Hz. Terminal 54 Switch Setting [1663] Setting of in-
Motor Current [A] [1614] Phase current of the put terminal 54. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
motor measured as effective value. Analog Input 54 [1664] Actual value at input 54
Frequency [%] [1615] Motor frequency, i.e. the either as reference or protection value.
output frequency from the frequency converter in Analog Output 42 [mA] [1665] Actual value at
percent. output 42 in mA. Use par. 6-50 to select the value
Torque [%] [1616] Present motor load as a per- to be shown.
centage of the rated motor torque. Digital output [bin] [1666] Binary value of all dig-
*Speed [RPM] [1617] Speed in RPM (revolutions ital outputs.
per minute) i.e. the motor shaft speed in closed Frequency input #29 [Hz] [1667] Actual value of
loop. the frequency applied at terminal 29 as an im-
Motor thermal [1618] Thermal load on the motor, pulse input.
calculated by the ETR function. Frequency input #33 [Hz] [1668] Actual value of
DC Link Voltage [V] [1630] Intermediate circuit the frequency applied at terminal 33 as an im-
voltage in the frequency converter. pulse input.
BrakeEnergy/s [1632] Present brake power trans- Pulse output #27 [Hz] [1669] Actual value of im-
ferred to an external brake resistor. pulses applied to terminal 27 in digital output
Stated as an instantaneous value. mode.
BrakeEnergy/2 min [1633] Brake power transfer- Pulse output #29 [Hz] [1670] Actual value of im-
red to an external brake resistor. The mean power pulses applied to terminal 29 in digital output
is calculated continuously for the most recent 120 mode.
seconds. Fieldbus control word1 signal [1680] Control word
Heatsink Temperature [oC] [1634] Present heat (CTW) received from the Bus Master.
sink temperature of the frequency converter. The Fieldbus speed set-point A signal [1682] Main ref-
cut-out limit is 95 ±5 oC; cutting back in occurs erence value sent with control word from the Bus
at 70 ±5° C. Master.
Inverter thermal [1635] Percentage load of the Communication Option Status Word [binary]
inverters. [1684] Extended fieldbus communication option
Inv. Nom. Current [1636] Nominal current of the status word.
frequency converter. FC port control word1 signal [1685] Control word
Inv. Max. Current [1637] Maximum current of the (CTW) received from the Bus Master.
frequency converter. FC port speed set-point A signal [1686] Status
Condition control state [1638] State of the event word (STW) sent to the Bus Master.
executed by the control. Alarm word [Hex] [1690] One or more alarms in
Control Card Temperature [1639] Temperature of a Hex code.
the control card. Alarm word 2 [Hex] [1691] One or more alarms in
External Reference [1650] [%] Sum of the exter- a Hex code.
nal reference as a percentage, i.e. the sum of Warning word [Hex] [1692] One or more warn-
analog/pulse/bus. ings in a Hex code.
Pulse Reference [1651] [Hz] Frequency in Hz con- Warning word 2 [Hex] [1693] One or more warn-
nected to the digital inputs (18, 19 or 32, 33). ings in a Hex code.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

32 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Ext. status word [Hex] [1694] One or more status

conditions in a Hex code.
Ext. status word 2 [Hex] [1695] One or more sta- 0-24 Display Line 3 Large
tus conditions in a Hex code. Value:
Counter [kWh] [1502]

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small Function:

Value: Select a variable for display in line 2. The options
are the same as those listed for par. 0-20 Display
Speed [RPM] [1617]
Line 1.1 Small.
Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1, middle po-
sition. The options are the same as listed for par. 0-25 My Personal Menu
0-2*. Array [20]

Value:
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small
0 - 9999
Value:
Motor Current [A] [1614] Function:
Define up to 50 parameters to appear in the Q1
Function: Personal Menu, accessible via the [Quick Menu]
Select a variable for display in line 1, middle po- key on the LCP. The parameters will be displayed
sition. The options are the same as listed for par. in the Q1 Personal Menu in the order they are pro-
0-2*. grammed into this array parameter. Delete pa-
rameters by setting the value to ‘0000’.
For example, this can be used to provide quick,
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small simple access to just one or up to 20 parameters
Value: which require changing on a regular basis (e.g. for
Power [kW] [1610] plant maintenance reasons) or by an OEM to en-
able simple commissioning of their equipment.
Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1, right posi- LCP Custom Readout, Par. 0-3*
tion. The options are the same as listed for par. It is possible to customize the display elements for
0-2*. various purposes: *Custom Readout. Value pro-
portional to speed (Linear, squared or cubed de-
pending on unit selected in par. 0-30Custom
Readout Unit ) *Display Text. Text string stored in
0-23 Display Line 2 Large a parameter.

Value: Custom Readout

Frequency [Hz] [1613] The calculated value to be displayed is based on
settings in par. 0-30,Custom Readout Unit, par.
Function: 0-31Custom Readout Min Value, (linear only),
Select a variable for display in line 2. The options par. 0-32, Custom Readout Max Value, par.
are the same as those listed for par. 0-2*. 4-13/4-14,Motor Speed High Limit , and actual
speed.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 33

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

kg/h [32]
ton/min [33]
ton/h [34]
Velocity:
m/s [40]
m/min [41]
Length:
m [45]
Temperature:
°C [60]
Pressure:
mbar [70]
The relation will depend on the type of unit selec- bar [71]
ted in par.0-30, Custom Readout Unit: Pa [72]
kPa [73]
Unit Type Speed Relation m WG [74]
Dimensionless Linear Power:
Speed
kW [80]
Flow, volume
Flow, volume:
Flow, mass
Velocity GPM [120]
Length gal/s [121]
Temperature gal/min [122]
Pressure Quadratic gal/h [123]
Power Cubic CFM [124]
ft3/s [125]
0-30 Custom Readout Unit ft3/min [126]
Value: ft3/h [127]
Dimensionless: Flow, mass:
None [0] lb/s [130]
% [1] lb/min [131]
PPM [5] lb/h [132]
Speed: Velocity:
1/min [10] ft/s [140]
RPM [11] ft/min [141]
Pulse/s [12] Length:
Flow, volume: ft [145]
l/s [20] Temperature:
l/min [21] °F [160]
l/h [22] Pressure:
m3/s [23] psi [170]
m3/min [24] lb/in2 [171]
m3/h [25] in WG [172]
Flow, mass: ft WG [173]
kg/s [30] Power:
kg/min [31] HP [180]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

34 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: wise define the password in par. 0-60 Main Menu

It is possible to program a value to be shown in Password.
the display of the LCP. The value will have a linear,
squared or cubed relation to speed. This relation
will depend on the unit selected (see table above). 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP
The actual calculated value can be read in Custom Value:
Readout, par. 16-09, and/or shown in the display Disabled [0]
be selecting Custom Readout [16-09] in par. 0-20 Enabled [1]
– 0-24, Display Line X.X Small (large).
Password [2]

Function:
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value Press [Off] and select Disabled [0] to avoid acci-
Value: dental stop of the frequency converter. Select
0 - par. 0 - 32 0.00 Password [2] to avoid unauthorised stop. If par.
Function: 0-41 is included in the Quick Menu, then define
This parameter sets the min. value of the custom the password in par. 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
defined readout (occurs at zero speed). Only pos-
sible to set different from 0 is when selecting a
linear unit in Custom Readout Unit, par. 0-30. For 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP
Quadratic and Cubic units the minimum value will Value:
be 0. Disabled [0]
Enabled [1]
Password [2]
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value
Value: Function:
Par. 0-31 - 999999.99 100.00 Press [Auto on] and select Disabled [0] to avoid
Function: accidental start of the frequency converter in Auto
This parameter sets the max value to be shown mode. Select Password [2] to avoid unauthorised
when the speed of the motor has reached the set start in Auto mode. If par. 0-42 is included in the
value for Motor Speed High Limit, (par. Quick Menu, then define the password in par. 0-65
4-13/4-14). Quick Menu Password.

LCP Keypad, 0-4*

0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP
Enable, disable and password protect individual
Value:
keys on the LCP keypad.
Disabled [0]
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP Enabled [1]
Value: Password [2]
Disabled [0]
Function:
Enabled [1]
Press [Reset] and select Disabled [0] to avoid ac-
Password [2] cidental alarm reset. Press [Reset] and select
Password [2] to avoid unauthorised resetting. If
Function:
par. 0-43 is included in the Quick Menu, then de-
Select Disabled [0] to disable the [Hand On] but-
fine the password in par. 0-65 Quick Menu Pass-
ton on the LCP. Select Password [2] to avoid un-
word.
authorised start in Hand mode. If par. 0-40 is
included in the Quick Menu, then define the pass-
word in par. 0-65 Quick Menu Password. Other- 0-5* Copy / Save
Copy parameter settings between set-ups and to/
from the LCP.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 35

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

0-50 LCP Copy

0-60 Main Menu Password
Value:
Value:
No copy [0]
-9999 - 9999 100
All to LCP [1]
Function:
All from LCP [2]
Define the password for access to the Main Menu
Size indep. from LCP [3]
via the [Main Menu] key. If par. 0-61 Access to
File from MCO to LCP [4] Main Menu w/o Password is set to Full access [0],
File from LCP to MCO [5] this parameter will be ignored.

Function:
Select All to LCP [1] to copy all parameters in all Access to Main Menu w/o Pass-
set-ups from the frequency converter memory to 0-61
word
the LCP memory.
Value:
Select All from LCP all [2] to copy all parameters
Full access [0]
in all set-ups from the LCP memory to the fre-
quency converter memory. Read only [1]
Select Size indep. from LCP [3] to copy only the No access [2]
parameters that are independent of the motor Bus: Read only [3]
size. The latter selection can be used to pro- Bus: No access [4]
gramme several drives with the same function All: Read only [5]
without disturbing motor data. This parameter
All: No access [6]
cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
Function:
Select Full access [0] to disable the password de-
0-51 Set-up Copy fined in par. 0-60 Main Menu Password. Select
Value: Read only [1] to prevent unauthorised editing of
No copy [0] Main Menu parameters. Select No access [2] to
Copy to set-up 1 [1] prevent unauthorised viewing and editing of Main
Copy to set-up 2 [2] Menu parameters. Select Bus: Read only [3] for
read only functions for parameters on fieldbus
Copy to set-up 3 [3]
and/ or FC standard bus. Select Bus: No access
Copy to set-up 4 [4]
[4] when no access to parameters is allowed via
Copy to all [9] fieldbus and/ or FC standard bus. Select All: Read
only [5] for read only function for parameters on
Function:
LCP, fieldbus or FC standard bus. Select All: No
Select Copy to set-up 1 [1] to copy all parameters
access [6] when no access from LCP, fieldbus or
in the present edit set-up (defined in par. 0-11
FC standard bus is allowed. If Full access [0] is
Edit Set-up) to Set-up 1. Likewise, select the op-
selected then parameters 0-60, 0-65 and 0-66 will
tion corresponding to the other set-up(s). Select
be ignored.
Copy to all [9] to copy the parameters in the
present set-up over to each of the set-ups 1 to 4.
0-65 Quick Menu Password
0-6* Password Value:
Define password access to menus. -9999 - 9999 200
Function:
Define the password for access to the Quick Menu
via the [Quick Menu] key. If par. 0-66 Access to
Quick Menu w/o Password is set to Full access [0],
this parameter will be ignored.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

36 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Access to Quick Menu w/o Pass- Process [3]

0-66
word
Value: Function:
Full access [0] Select the application control principle to be used
when a Remote Reference (i.e. via analog input or
Read only [1]
fieldbus) is active. A Remote Reference can only
No access [2]
be active when par. 3-13 Reference Site is set to
Bus: Read only [3] [0] or [1].
Bus: No access [4] Speed open loop [0]: Enables speed control (with-
All: Read only [5] out feedback signal from motor) with automatic
All: No access [6] slip compensation for almost constant speed at
varying loads.
Function: Compensations are active but can be disabled in
Select Full access [0] to disable the password de- the Load/Motor par. group 1-0*.
fined in par. 0-65 Quick Menu Password. Select Speed closed loop [1]: Enables encoder feedback
Read only [1] to prevent unauthorised editing of from motor. Obtain full holding torque at 0 RPM.
Quick Menu parameters. Select No access [2] to For increased speed accuracy, provide a feedback
prevent unauthorised viewing and editing of Quick signal and set the speed PID control.
Menu parameters. Select Bus: Read only [3] for Torque [2]: Connects the encoder speed feedback
read only functions for parameters on fieldbus signal to the encoder input. Only possible with
and/ or FC standard bus. Select Bus: No access “Flux with motor feedback” option, par. 1-01 Mo-
[4] when no access to parameters is allowed via tor control principle.
fieldbus and/ or FC standard bus. Select All: Read Process [3]: Enables the use of process control in
only [5] for read only function for parameters on the frequency converter. The process control pa-
LCP, fieldbus or FC standard bus. Select All: No rameters are set in par. groups 7-2* and 7-3*.
access [6] when no access from LCP, fieldbus or
FC standard bus is allowed. If par. 0-61 Access to
Main Menu w/o Password is set to Full access [0] 1-01 Motor Control Principle
then this parameter will be ignored. Value:
U/f [0]
VVCplus [1]
0-67 Bus Password Access
Flux sensorless (FC 302 only) [2]
Value:
Flux w/ motor feedback(FC 302 only) [3]
0 - 9999 0
Function: Function:
Writing to this parameter enables users to unlock Select which motor control principle to employ.
the drive from bus/ MCT10 Select U/f [0], a special motor mode, for parallel
connected motors in special motor applications.
Parameters: Load and Motor When U/f is selected the characteristic of the con-
trol principle can be edited in par. 1-55 and 1-56.
1-0* General Settings Select VVCplus [1] for a Voltage Vector Control
Define whether the frequency converter operates principle suitable for most applications. The main
in speed mode or torque mode; and whether the benefit of VVCplus operation is that it uses a robust
internal PID control should be active or not. motor model.
Select Flux sensorless [2], i.e. Flux Vector control
1-00 Configuration Mode without encoder feedback, for simple installation
and robustness against sudden load changes.
Value:
Select Flux with encoder feedback [3] for very
Speed open loop [0]
high accuracy speed and torque control, suitable
Speed closed loop [1] for the most demanding applications.
Torque [2]

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 37

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

The best shaft performance is normally achieved Constant torque [0]: The motor shaft output will
using either of the two Flux Vector control modes provide constant torque under variable speed
Flux sensorless [2] and Flux with encoder feed- control.
back [3]. Variable Torque [1]: The motor shaft output will
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- provide variable torque under variable speed con-
tor is running. trol. Set the variable torque level in par. 14-40 VT
Level.
Automatic Energy Optimizing function [2]: This
1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source function automatically optimises energy con-
Value: sumption by minimising magnetisation and fre-
24 V encoder [1] quency via par. 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisa-
tion and par. 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency.
MCB 102 [2]
MCB 103 [3] This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.
MCO 305 encoder 1 [4]
MCO 305 encoder 2 [5]

1-04 Overload Mode

Value:
Function:
Select the interface at which to receive feedback High torque [0]
from the motor. Normal torque [1]
24V encoder [1] is an A and B channel encoder,
which can be connected to the digital input termi- Function:
nals 32/33 only. Terminals 32/33 must be pro- High torque [0] allows up to 160% over torque.
grammed to no operation. Normal torque [1] is for oversized motor - allows
MCB 102 [2] is an encoder module option which up to 110% over torque.
can be configured in par. group 17-1* This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
This parameter appears in FC 302 only. tor is running.
MCB 103 [3] is an optional resolver interface mod-
ule which can be configured in parameter group
17-5* 1-05 Local Mode Configuration
MCO 305 Encoder 1 [4] is encoder interface 1 of Value:
the optional programmable motion controller MCO Speed open loop [0]
305. Speed closed loop [1]
MCO 305 Encoder 2 [5] is encoder interface 2 of As mode par. 1-00 [2]
the optional programmable motion controller MCO
305. Function:
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- Select which application configuration mode (par.
tor is running. 1-00), i.e. application control principle, to use
when a Local (LCP) Reference is active. A Local
Reference can be active only when par. 3-13 Ref-
1-03 Torque Characteristics erence Site is set to [0] or [2]. By default the local
Value: reference is active in Hand Mode only.

Constant torque [0]

Variable torque [1] 1-1* Motor selection

Auto energy optim. [2] Parameter group for setting general motor data.
This parameter group cannot be adjusted while
Function: the motor is running.
Select the torque characteristic required.
VT and AEO are both energy saving operations.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

38 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

responds to the nominal rated output of the unit.

1-10 Motor Construction This parameter is visible in LCP if par. 0-03 is US
Value: [1]
Asynchronous [0]
PM, non salient SPM (FC 302 only) [1]
1-22 Motor Voltage
Function: Value:
Select the motor design type. 10 - 1000 V [Size related]
Select Asynchronous [0] for asynchronous mo-
tors. Function:
Select PM, non salient SPM (FC 302 only) [1] for Enter the nominal motor voltage according to the
permanent magnet (PM) motors. motor nameplate data. The default value corre-
Note that PM motors are divided into two groups, sponds to the nominal rated output of the unit.
with either surface mounted (non salient) or inte-
rior (salient) magnets.
Motor design can either be asynchronous or per- 1-23 Motor Frequency
manent magnet (PM) motor. Value:
50 Hz when parameter 0-03 = interna-
tional (50 HZ) [50]
1-2* Motor Data 60 Hz when parameter 0-03 = US (60
Parameter group 1-2* comprises input data from HZ) [60]
the nameplate on the connected motor. Min - Max motor frequency: 20 - 1000
Parameters in parameter group 1-2* cannot be Hz
adjusted while the motor is running.

NB! Function:
Changing the value of these parame- Select the motor frequency value from the motor
ters affects the setting of other param- nameplate data. If a value different from 50 Hz or
eters. 60 Hz is selected, it is necessary to adapt the load
independent settings in par. 1-50 to 1-53. For 87
Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set the
1-20 Motor Power
nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt par. 4-13
Value:
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM) and par. 3-03 Max-
0.09 - 500 kW [Size related] imum Reference to the 87 Hz application.

Function:
Enter the nominal motor power in kW according to
1-24 Motor Current
the motor nameplate data. The default value cor-
Value:
responds to the nominal rated output of the unit.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- Motor type dependent.
tor is running. This parameter is visible in LCP if
Function:
par. 0-03 is International [0].
Enter the nominal motor current value from the
motor nameplate data. The data are used for cal-
culating torque, motor protection etc.
1-21 Motor Power [HP]
Value:
0.09 - 500 HP [Size related] 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
Value:
Function:
Enter the nominal motor power in HP according to 10 - 60000 RPM [Size related]
the motor nameplate data. The default value cor-

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 39

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Note:
Enter the nominal motor speed value from the • For the best adaptation of the frequency
motor nameplate data. The data are used for cal- converter, run AMA on a cold motor.
culating motor compensations.
• AMA cannot be performed while the motor
is running.

1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque • AMA cannot be performed on permanent

Value: magnet motors.

1.0 - 10000.0 Nm [Size related] NB!

It is important to set motor par. 1-2*
Function: Motor Data correctly, since these form
Enter the value from the motor nameplate data. part of the AMA algorithm. An AMA
The default value corresponds to the nominal rat- must be performed to achieve opti-
ed output. This parameter is available when par. mum dynamic motor performance. It
1-10Motor Design is set to PM, non salient SPM may take up to 10 min, depending on
[1], i.e. the parameter is valid for PM and non-sa- the power rating of the motor.
lient SPM motors only.
NB!
Avoid generating external torque dur-
ing AMA.
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
Value: NB!
OFF [0] If one of the settings in par. 1-2* Mo-
Enable complete AMA [1] tor Data is changed, par. 1-30 to 1-39,
the advanced motor parameters, will
Enable reduced AMA [2]
return to default setting.
Function:
The AMA function optimises dynamic motor per- 1-3* Adv. Motor Data
formance by automatically optimising the ad- Parameters for advanced motor data. The motor
vanced motor parameters (par. 1-30 to par. 1-35) data in par. 1-30 - par. 1-39 must match the rel-
at motor standstill. evant motor in order to run the motor optimally.
Select the type of AMA. Enable complete AMA [1] The default settings are figures based on common
performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the ro- motor parameter values from standard motors. If
tor resistance Rr, the stator leakage reactance the motor parameters are not set correctly, a mal-
X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main function of the drive system may occur. If the
reactance Xh. Select this option if an LC filter is motor data is not known, running an AMA (Auto-
used between the drive and the motor. matic Motor Adaptation) is recommended. See the
FC 301: The Complete AMA does not include Xh Automatic Motor Adaptation section. The AMA se-
measurement for FC 301. Instead, the Xh value is quence will adjust all motor parameters except
determined from the motor database. Par. 1-35 the moment of inertia of the rotor and the iron loss
Main Reactance (Xh ) may be adjusted to obtain resistance (par. 1-36).
optimal start performance. Parameters 1-3* and 1-4* cannot be adjusted
Select Reduced AMA [2] for a reduced AMA of the while the motor is running.
stator resistance Rs in the system only. Activate
the AMA function by pressing [Hand on] after se-
lecting [1] or [2]. See also the section Automatic
Motor Adaptation. After a normal sequence, the
display will read: "Press [OK] to finish AMA". After
pressing the [OK] key the frequency converter is
ready for operation. This parameter cannot be ad-
justed while the motor is running.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

40 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Motor equivalent diagram for an asynchronous Function:

motor Set the rotor leakage reactance of the motor using
one of these methods:
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) 1. Run an AMA on a cold motor. The fre-
Value: quency converter will measure the value
Ohm Size related from the motor.
Function: 2. Enter the X2 value manually. Obtain the
Set the stator resistance value. Enter the value value from the motor supplier.
from a motor data sheet or perform an AMA on a
cold motor. 3. Use the X2 default setting. The frequency
converter establishes the setting on the
basis of the motor name plate data.
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
Value:
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
Ohm Size related
Value:
Function:
Ohm Size related
Fine-tuning Rr will improve shaft performance. Set
the rotor resistance value using one of these Function:
methods: Set the main reactance of the motor using one of
these methods:
1. Run an AMA on a cold motor. The fre-
quency converter will measure the value 1. Run an AMA on a cold motor. The fre-
from the motor. All compensations are re- quency converter will measure the value
set to 100%. from the motor.

2. Enter the Rr value manually. Obtain the 2. Enter the Xh value manually. Obtain the
value from the motor supplier. value from the motor supplier.

3. Use the Rr default setting. The frequency 3. Use the Xh default setting. The frequency
converter establishes the setting on the converter establishes the setting on the
basis of the motor nameplate data. basis of the motor name plate data.

1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)

Value: Value:

Ohm Size related 1 - 10.000 Ω Size related

Function: Function:
Set the stator leakage reactance of the motor us- Enter the equivalent iron loss resistance (RFe) val-
ing one of these methods: ue to compensate for iron loss in the motor.
The RFe value cannot be found by performing an
1. Run an AMA on a cold motor. The fre-
AMA.
quency converter will measure the value
The RFe value is especially important in torque
from the motor.
control applications. If RFe is unknown, leave par.
2. Enter the X1 value manually. Obtain the 1-36 on default setting.
value from the motor supplier.
3. Use the X1 default setting. The frequency
converter establishes the setting on the 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
basis of the motor name plate data. Value:
0.0 - 1000.0 mH 0.0mH

1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)

Value:
Ohm Size related

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 41

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function:
Enter the value of the d-axis inductance. Obtain
the value from the permanent magnet motor data
sheet.
This parameter is only active when par. 1-10 Mo-
tor Design has the value PM, non-salient SPM [1]
(Permanent Magnet Motor).
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

1-39 Motor Poles

Value:
Depends on motor type
Value 2 - 100 poles 4
Function:
Enter the number of motor poles.

Poles ~nn@ 50 Hz ~nn@60 Hz

2 2700 - 2880 3250 - 3460
4 1350 - 1450 1625 - 1730
6 700 - 960 840 - 1153
The table shows the number of poles for normal
speed ranges of various motor types. Define mo-
tors designed for other frequencies separately.
The motor pole value is always an even number,
because it refers to the total number of poles, not
pairs of poles. The frequency converter creates
the initial setting of par. 1-39 based on par.
1-23 Motor Frequency and par. 1-25 Motor Nom-
inal Speed.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

42 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

1-4* LCP Keypad Min Speed Normal Magnetising

1-51
[RPM]
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM
Value:
Value: 10 - 300 RPM 15RPM
10 - 9000 V 500V
Function:
Function: Set the required speed for normal magnetising
Set the nominal back EMF for the motor when current. If the speed is set lower than the motor
running at 1000 RPM. This parameter is only ac- slip speed, par. 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
tive when par. 1-10 Motor Design is set to PM Speed and par. 1-51 are of no significance.
motor [1] (Permanent Magnet Motor). Use this par. along with par. 1-50. See drawing for
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. par. 1-50.

1-41 Motor Angle Offset Min Speed Normal Magnetising

1-52
Value: [Hz]
0 - 65535 0 Value:
Function: 0 - 250 Hz [Size related]
Enter the correct offset angle between the PM mo-
tor and the index position (single-turn) of the at- Function:
tached encoder or resolver. The value range of 0 Set the required frequency for normal magnetis-
– 65535 corresponds to 0 - 2 * pi (radians). To ing current. If the frequency is set lower than the
obtain the offset angle value: After drive start-up motor slip frequency, par. 1-50 Motor Magnetisa-
apply DC-hold and enter the value of par. 16-20 tion at Zero Speed is inactive.
Motor Angle into this parameter. Use this par. along with par. 1-50. See drawing for
This parameter is only active when par. 1-10 Mo- par. 1-50.
tor Design is set to PM, non-salient SPM [1] (Per-
manent Magnet Motor).
1-53 Model Shift Frequency

1-5* Load Indep. Setting Value:

Parameters for setting the load-independent mo- 4.0 - 50.0 Hz [Size related]
tor settings.
Function:
Flux Model shift
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed
Enter the frequency value for shift between two
Value:
models for determining motor speed. Choose the
0 - 300 % 100%
value based on settings in par. 1-00 Configuration
Function: Mode and par. 1-01 Motor Control Principle. There
Use this par. along with par. 1-51 Min Speed Nor- are two options: shift between Flux model 1 and
mal Magnetising [RPM] to obtain a different ther- Flux model 2; or shift between Variable Current
mal load on the motor when running at low speed. mode and Flux model 2. This parameter is avail-
Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated able for FC 302 only.
magnetizing current. If the setting is too low, the This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
torque on the motor shaft may be reduced. tor is running.
Flux Model 1 – Flux model 2
This model is used when par. 1-00 is set to Speed
closed loop [1] or Torque [2] and par. 1-01 is set
to Flux w/motor feedback [3]. With this parameter
it is possible to make an adjustment of the shifting
point where FC 302 changes between Flux model

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 43

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

1 and Flux model 2, which is useful in some sen- 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F
sitive speed and torque control applications. Value:
0.0 - max. motor frequency Size related
Function:
Enter the frequency points to manually form a U/
f-characteristic matching the motor.
The voltage at each point is defined in par. 1-55
U/f Characteristic - U.
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5] and is
only accessible when par. 1-01 Motor Control Prin-
ciple is set to U/f [0].

Par. 1-00 = [1] Speed closed loop or [2] Torque

and par. 1-01 = [3] Flux w/motor feedback

Variable Current - Flux model - Sensorless

This model is used when par. 1-00 is set to Speed
open loop [0] and par. 1-01 is set to Flux sensor-
less [2].
In speed open loop in flux mode, the speed is de-
termined from the current measurement.
Below fnorm x 0.1, the drive runs on a Variable
Current model. Above fnorm x 0.125 the frequency
converter runs on a Flux model.

1-6* Load Depend. Setting

Parameters for adjusting the load-dependent mo-
tor settings.

1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation

Value:
0 - 300% 100%
Function:
Enter the % value to compensate voltage in rela-
Par. 1-00 = [0] Speed open loop tion to load when the motor is running at low
Par. 1-01 = [2] Flux sensorless speed and obtain the optimum U/f characteristic.
The motor size determines the frequency range
within which this parameter is active.
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U
Motor size Change over
Value:
0.25 kW - 7.5 kW < 10 Hz
0.0 - max. motor voltage Size related
Function:
Enter the voltage at each frequency point to man-
ually form a U/f characteristic matching the mo-
tor.
The frequency points are defined in par. 1-56 U/f
Characteristic - F.
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5] and is
only accessible when par. 1-01 Motor Control Prin-
ciple is set to U/f [0].

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

44 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Description of choice: ue results in quick reaction. If low-frequency res-

onance problems arise, use a longer time setting.

1-64 Resonance Dampening

Value:
0 - 500 % 100%
Function:
Enter the resonance dampening value. Set par.
1-64 and par. 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency reso-
nance problems. To reduce resonance oscillation,
increase the value of par. 1-64.

1-61 High Speed Load Compensation

Resonance Dampening Time Con-
Value: 1-65
stant
0 - 300% 100%
Value:
Function:
5 - 50 msec. 5 msec.
Enter the % value to compensate voltage in rela-
tion to load when the motor is running at high Function:
speed and obtain the optimum U/f characteristic. Set par. 1-64 Resonance Dampening and par.
The motor size determines the frequency range 1-65 to help eliminate high-frequency resonance
within which this parameter is active. problems. Enter the time constant that provides
the best dampening.
Motor size Change-over
0.25 kW - 7.5 kW > 10 Hz
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
Value:
1-62 Slip Compensation
0 - 200% 100%
Value:
Function:
-500 - 500 % 100%
Enter the minimum motor current at low speed,
Function:
see par. 1-53 Model Shift Frequency. Increasing
Enter the % value for slip compensation, to com-
this current improves motor torque at low speed.
pensate for tolerances in the value of nM,N. Slip
Par. 1-66 is enabled when par. 1-00 Configuration
compensation is calculated automatically, i.e. on
Mode = Speed open loop [0] only. The drive runs
the basis of the rated motor speed nM,N. with constant current through motor for speeds
This function is not active when par. 1-00 Config- below 10 Hz.
uration Mode is set to Speed closed loop [1] or For speeds above 10 Hz, the motor flux model in
Torque [2] Torque control with speed feedback or the drive controls the motor. Par. 4-16 Torque
when par. 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to U/ Limit Motor Mode and / or par. 4-17 Torque Limit
f [0] special motor mode. Generator Mode automatically adjust par. 1-66.
The parameter with the highest value adjusts par.
1-66. The current setting in par. 1-66 is composed
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant of the torque generating current and the magnet-
Value: izing current.
0.05 - 5.00 s 0.10s Example: Set par. 4-16 Torque Limit for Motor
Function: Mode to 100% and set par. 4-17 Torque Limit for
Enter the slip compensation reaction speed. A Generating Mode to 60%. Par. 1-66 automatically
high value results in slow reaction, and a low val-

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 45

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

adjusts to about 127%, depending on the motor 1-71 Start Delay

size. Value:
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. 0.0 - 10.0 s 0.0s
Function:
This parameter refers to the start function selec-
1-67 Load Type
ted in par. 1-72 Start Function.
Value: Enter the time delay required before commencing
Passive load [0] acceleration.
Active load [1]

Function: 1-72 Start Function

Select passive load [0] for conveyers, fan and Value:
pump applications. Select active load [1] for hoist-
DC hold/ delay time [0]
ing applications. When active load [1] is selected,
DC Brake/delay time [1]
set par. 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed to a level
which corresponds to maximum torque. Coast/delay time [2]
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Start speed/ current clockwise operation [3]
Horizontal operation [4]
VVCplus/ Flux clockwise [5]
1-68 Minimum Inertia
Hoist Mech. Brake Rel [6]
Value:
0.0001 - Par. 1-69 0.0048 Function:
Function: Select the start function during start delay. This
Enter the minimum moment of inertia of the me- parameter is linked to par. 1-71 Start Delay.
chanical system. Par. 1-68 and par. 1-69 Maxi- Select DC hold/delay time [0] to energize the
mum Inertia are used for pre-adjustment of the motor with a DC holding current (par. 2-00) dur-
Proportional Gain in the speed control, see par. ing the start delay time.
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain. Select DC brake/delay time [1] to energize the
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. motor with a DC braking current (par. 2-01) dur-
ing the start delay time.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while motor is
Select Coast/delay time [2] to release the shaft
running.
coasted converter during the start delay time (in-
verter off).
[3] and [4] are only possible with VVC+.
1-69 Maximum Inertia
Select Start speed/current clockwise [3] to con-
Value: nect the function described in par. 1-74 Start
0 - 0.4800 0.0048 Speed (RPM) and par. 1-76 Start Current in the
Function: start delay time.
Enter the maximum moment of inertia of the me- Regardless of the value applied by the reference
chanical system. Par. 1-68 Minimum Inertia and signal, the output speed applies the setting of the
par. 1-69 are used for pre-adjustment of the Pro- start speed in par. 1-74 or par. 1-75 and the out-
portional Gain in the speed control, see par. 7-02 put current corresponds to the setting of the start
Speed PID Proportional Gain. current in par. 1-76 Start Current. This function is
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. typically used in hoisting applications without
This parameter cannot be adjusted while motor is counterweight and especially in applications with
running. a Cone-motor, where the start is clockwise, fol-
lowed by rotation in the reference direction. Select
Horizontal operation [4] to obtain the function de-
1-7* Start Adjustments
scribed in par. 1-74 and par. 1-76 during the start
Parameters for setting special motor start fea- delay time. The motor rotates in the reference di-
tures.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

46 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

rection. If the reference signal equals zero (0), Function:

par. 1-74 Start speed (RPM) is ignored and the Set the motor start speed. After the start signal
output speed equals zero (0). The output current the motor output speed leaps to the set value.
corresponds to the setting of the start current in This parameter can be used for hoist applications
par. 1-76 Start current. (cone rotor motors). Set the start function in par.
Select VVC+/Flux clockwise [5] for the function 1-72 Start Function to [3], [4] or [5], and set a
described in par. 1-74 only (Start speed in the start delay time in par. 1-71 Start Delay. A refer-
start delay time). The start current is calculated ence signal must be present.
automatically. This function uses the start speed
in the start delay time only. Regardless of the val-
ue set by the reference signal, the output speed 1-75 Start Speed [Hz]
equals the setting of the start speed in par. Value:
1-74.Start speed/current clockwise [3] and
0 - 500 Hz 0Hz
VVCplus/Flux clockwise [5] are typically used in
Function:
hoisting applications. Start speed/current in ref-
Set the motor start speed. After the start signal
erence direction [4] is particularly used in appli-
the motor output speed leaps to the set value.
cations with counterweight and horizontal move-
This parameter can be used for hoist applications
ment.
(cone rotor motors). Set the start function in par.
Select Hoist Mech. Brake [6] for utilizing mechan-
1-72 Start Function to [3], [4] or [5], and set a
ical brake control functions, par. 2-24 to 2-28.
start delay time in par. 1-71 Start Delay. A refer-
This parameter is only active when par. 1-01 is set
ence signal must be present.
to [3] Flux w/ motor feedback (FC 302 only).

1-76 Start Current

1-73 Flying Start [RPM]
Value:
Value:
0.00 - par. 1-24 0.00A
Off (DISABLE) [0]
Function:
On (ENABLE) [1]
Some motors, such as cone rotor motors, need
Function: extra current/starting speed (boost) to disengage
This function makes it possible to catch a motor the mechanical brake. Adjust par. 1-74 Start
which is spinning freely due to a mains drop-out. Speed [RPM] and par. 1-76 to get this boost. Set
the required current value to disengage the me-
chanical brake. Set par. 1-72 Start Function to [3]
Description of choice:
or [4], and set a start delay time in par. 1-71 Start
Select Disable [0] if this function is not required.
Delay. A reference signal must be present.
Select Enable [1] to enable the frequency con-
verter to “catch” and control a spinning motor.
When par. 1-73 is enabled par. 1-71 Start Delay 1-8* Stop Adjustments
and 1-72 Start Function have no function. Parameters for setting special stop features for
the motor.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while motor is
running.
1-80 Function at Stop
NB! Value:
This function is not recommended for
Coast [0]
hoisting applications.
DC hold [1]
Motor check [2]
1-74 Start Speed [RPM]
Pre-magnetizing [3]
Value:
DC Voltage U0 [4]
0 - 600 RPM 0RPM

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 47

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Select Counter stop (with or without reset) to run

Select the drive function after a stop command or the frequency converter from receipt of a pulse
after the speed is ramped down to the settings in start signal until the number of pulses program-
par. 1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]. med by the user in par. 1-84 Precise Stop Counter
Select Coasting [0] to leave the motor in free Value has been received at input terminal 29 or
mode. input terminal 33.
Select DC hold [1] to energize the motor with a An internal stop signal will activate the normal
DC holding current (see par. 2-00). ramp down time (par. 3-42, 3-52, 3-62 or 3-72).
Select Motor check [2] to check if a motor has The counter function is activated (starts timing) at
been connected. the edge of the start signal (when it changes from
Select Pre-magnetizing [3] to build up a magnetic stop to start).
field while the motor is stopped. The motor can Speed compensated stop [3]: To stop at precisely
now produce a quick torque build-up at start. the same point, regardless of the present speed,
the stop signal is delayed internally when the
present speed is lower than the maximum speed
(set in par. 4-19).
Min Speed for Function at Stop Counter stop and Speed-compensated stop can be
1-81
[RPM] combined with or without reset.
Value: Counter stop with reset. After each precise stop
the number of pulses counted during ramp down
0 - 600 RPM 3 RPM
0 rpm is reset.
Function:
Counter stop without reset. The number of pulses
Set the speed at which to activate par. 1-80 Func-
counted during ramp down to 0 rpm is deducted
tion at stop.
from the counter value in par. 1-84.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.

Min Speed for Function at Stop

1-82
[Hz]
1-84 Precise Stop CounterValue
Value:
Value:
0.0 - 500 Hz 0.0Hz 0 - 999999999 100000
Function:
Function:
Set the output frequency at which to activate par.
Enter the counter value to be used in the integra-
1-80 Function at stop.
ted precise stop function, par. 1-83.
The maximum permissible frequency at terminal
29 or 33 is 110 kHz.
1-83 Precise Stop Function
Value:
Precise ramp stop [0] Precise Stop Speed Compensation
1-85
Counter stop with reset [1] Delay
Counter stop without reset [2] Value:
Speed compensated stop [3] 1-100 ms 10 ms
Speed compensated counter stop with re- Function:
set [4] Enter the delay time for sensors, PLCs, etc. for use
Speed compensated counter stop without in par. 1-83 Precise Stop Function. In speed com-
reset [5] pensated stop mode, the delay time at different
frequencies has a major influence on the stop
Function: function.
Select Precise ramp stop [0] to achieve high re-
petitive precision at the stopping point.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

48 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

1-9* Motor Temperature

Parameters for setting the temperature protection
features for the motor.

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

Value:
No protection [0]
Thermistor warning [1]
Thermistor trip [2]
ETR warning 1 [3]
ETR trip 1 [4]
ETR warning 2 [5] Motor protection can be implemented using a
ETR trip 2 [6] range of techniques: PTC or KTY sensor in motor
ETR warning 3 [7] windings; mechanical thermal switch (Klixon
type); or Electronic Thermal Relay (ETR).
ETR trip 3 [8]
ETR warning 4 [9] Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply:
Example: The frequency converter trips when the
ETR trip 4 [10]
motor temperature is too high
Function: Parameter set-up:
The frequency converter determines the motor Set Par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to Ther-
temperature formotor protection in two different mistor Trip [2]
ways: Set Par. 1-93 Thermistor Source to Digital Input
[6]
• Via a thermistor sensor connected to one
of the analog or digital inputs (par. 1-93
Thermistor Source).
• Via calculation (ETR = Electronic Terminal
Relay) of the thermal load, based on the
actual load and time. The calculated ther-
mal load is compared with the rated motor
current IM,N and the rated motor frequen-
cy fM,N. The calculations estimate the need Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply:
for a lower load at lower speed due to less Example: The frequency converter trips when the
cooling from the fan incorporated in the motor temperature is too high.
motor. Parameter set-up:
Select No protection [0] for a continuously over- Set Par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to Ther-
loaded motor, when no warning or trip of drive is mistor Trip [2]
required. Set Par. 1-93 Thermistor Source to Digital Input
Select Thermistor warning [1] to activate a warn- [6]
ing when the connected thermistor or KTY-sensor
in the motor reacts in the event of motor over-
temperature.
Select Thermistor trip [2] to stop (trip) the fre-
quency converter when the connected thermistor
in the motor reacts in the event of motor over-
temperature.
The thermistor cut-out value must be > 3 kΩ.
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the motor
for winding protection.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 49

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

American market: The ETR functions provide class

20 motor overload protection in accordance with
NEC.

Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the
motor temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
1-91 Motor External Fan
Set Par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to Ther-
mistor Trip [2] Value:
Set Par. 1-93 Thermistor Source to Analog Input No [0]
54 [2] Yes [1]
Do not select a reference source.
Function:
Select No [0] if no external fan is required, i.e. the
motor is derated at low speed.
Select Yes [1] to apply an external motor fan (ex-
ternal ventilation), so no derating of the motor is
required at low speed. The graph below is followed
if the motor current is lower than nominal motor
current (see par. 1-24). If the motor current ex-
ceeds nominal current, the operation time still de-
Input Supply Volt- Threshold creases as if no fan were installed.
Digital/ana- age Cut-out Values
log Volt
Digital 24 V < 6.6 kΩ - > 10.8 kΩ
Digital 10 V < 800Ω - > 2.7 kΩ
Analog 10 V < 3.0 kΩ - > 3.0 kΩ

NB!
Check that the chosen supply voltage
follows the specification of the used
thermistor element.

Select ETR Warning 1-4, to activate a warning on This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
the display when the motor is overloaded. tor is running.
Select ETR Trip 1-4 to trip the frequency converter
when the motor is overloaded.
Programme a warning signal via one of the digital 1-93 Thermistor Source
outputs. The signal appears in the event of a
Value:
warning and if the frequency converter trips (ther-
None [0]
mal warning).
ETR (Electronic Terminal Relay) functions 1-4 will Analog input 53 [1]
calculate the load when the set-up where they Analog input 54 [2]
were selected is active. For example ETR starts Digital input 18 [3]
calculating when setup 3 is selected. For the North Digital input 19 [4]
Digital input 32 [5]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

50 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Digital input 33 [6] KTY Sensor 2 [1]

KTY Sensor 3 [2]
Function:
Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC sen- Function:
sor) should be connected. An analog input option Select the used type of KTY sensor:
[1] or [2] cannot be selected if the analog input is
already in use as a reference source (selected in KTY Sensor type 1: 1Kohm at 100 degrees C
par. 3-15 Reference Source 1, 3-16 Reference KTY Sensor type 2: 1Kohm at 25 degrees C
Source 2 or 3-17 Reference Source 3). KTY Sensor type 3: 2Kohm at 25 degrees C
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running. This parameter only applies for FC 302.

KTY Sensor Connection

FC 302 only) 1-96 KTY Thermistor Source
Value:
KTY sensors are used especially in Permanent
Magnet Servo Motors (PM motors) for dynamic None [0]
adjusting of motor parameters as stator resist- Analog input 54 [2]
ance (par. 1-30) for PM motors and also rotor
resistance (par. 1-31) for asynchronous motors, Function:
depending on winding temperature. The calcula- Selecting analog input terminal 54 to be used as
tion is: KTY sensor input. Terminal 54 cannot be selected
as KTY source if otherwise used as reference (see
Rs = Rs 20° C x (1 + αcu x ∆T ) Ω where
par. 3-15 to 3-17).
α cu = 0.00393
This parameter only applies for FC 302.
KTY sensors can be used for motor protecting (par NB!
1-97). Connection of KTY-sensor between
FC 302 can handle three types of KTY sensors, term. 54 and 55 (GND). See picture in
defined in par 1-95. The actual sensor tempera- section KTY Sensor Connection under
ture can be read out from par 16-19. par. 1-93.

1-97 KTY Threshold level

Value:
-40 - 140° C 80° C
Function:
Select the KTY sensor threshold level for motor
thermal protection. This parameter only applies
for FC 302.
NB!
If the temperature of the motor is uti-
lized through a thermistor or KTY sen-
sor the PELV is not complied with in
case of short circuits between motor
windings and sensor. In order to com-
ply with PELV the sensor must be extra
isolated.

1-95 KTY Sensor Type

Value:
KTY Sensor 1 [0]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 51

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Brakes NB!

The maximum value depends on the
2-** Brakes rated motor current.
Parameter group for setting brake features in the NB!
frequency converter. Avoid 100 % current for too long. It
2-0* DC-Brakes may damage the motor.

Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and

DC hold functions.
2-02 DC Braking Time
Value:
2-00 DC Hold Current 0.0 - 60.0 s. 10.0s.
Value: Function:
0 - 160% 50 % Set the duration of the DC braking current set in
par. 2-01, once activated.
Function:
Enter a value for holding current as a percentage
of the rated motor current IM,N set in par. 1-24
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]
Motor Current. 100% DC holding current corre-
Value:
sponds to IM,N.
This parameter holds the motor function (holding 0 - par. 4 -13 0 RPM
torque) or pre-heats the motor. Function:
This parameter is active if DC hold is selected in Set the DC brake cut-in speed for activation of the
par. 1-72 Start Function [0] or par. 1-80 Function DC braking current set in par. 2-01, upon a stop
at Stop [1]. command.

NB!
The maximum value depends on the
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]
rated motor current.
Value:
NB!
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It 0 - par. 4 -14 0 RPM
may damage the motor. Function:
Set the DC brake cut-in speed for activation of the
DC braking current set in par. 2-01, upon a stop
command.
2-01 DC Brake Current
Value: 2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
0 - 1000 % 50% Parameter group for selecting dynamic braking
Function: parameters.
Enter a value for current as a percentage of the
rated motor current IM,N, see par. 1-24 Motor Cur- 2-10 Brake Function
rent. 100% DC braking current corresponds to Value:
IM,N. Off [0]
DC brake current is applied on a stop command, Resistor brake [1]
when the speed is lower than the limit set in par.
AC brake [2]
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed; when the DC Brake
Inverse function is active; or via the serial com-
Function:
munication port. The braking current is active dur-
Select Off [0] if no brake resistor is installed.
ing the time period set in par. 2-02 DC Braking
Select Resistor brake [1] if a brake resistor is in-
Time.
corporated in the system, for dissipation of sur-
plus brake energy as heat. Connecting a brake

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

52 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

resistor allows a higher DC link voltage during Function:

braking (generating operation). The Resistor This parameter is only active in frequency con-
brake function is only active in frequency convert- verters with an integral dynamic brake.
ers with an integral dynamic brake. This parameter enables monitoring of the power
to the brake resistor. The power is calculated on
the basis of the resistance (par. 2-11 Brake Re-
sistor (Ohm)), the DC link voltage, and the resis-
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) tor duty time.
Value: Select Off [0] if no brake power monitoring is re-
Ohm Size related quired.
Function: Select Warning [1] to activate a warning on the
Set the brake resistor value in Ohms. This value display when the power transmitted over 120 s
is used for monitoring the power to the brake re- exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit (par.
sistor in par. 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring. This 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)).
parameter is only active in frequency converters The warning disappears when the transmitted
with an integral dynamic brake. power falls below 80% of the monitoring limit.
Select Trip [2] to trip the frequency converter and
display an alarm when the calculated power ex-
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ceeds 100% of the monitoring limit.
Select Warning and Trip [3] to activate both of the
Value:
above, including warning, trip and alarm.
0.001 - Size related kW
If power monitoring is set to Off [0] or Warning
Function: [1], the brake function remains active, even if the
Set the monitoring limit of the brake power trans- monitoring limit is exceeded. This may lead to
mitted to the resistor. thermal overload of the resistor. It is also possible
The monitoring limit is a product of the maximum to generate a warning via a relay/digital outputs.
duty cycle (120 sec.) and the maximum power of The measuring accuracy of the power monitoring
the brake resistor at that duty cycle. See the for- depends on the accuracy of the resistance of the
mula below. resistor (better than ± 20%).
For 200 - 240 V 2
390 × dutytime
units: P resistor =
R × 120
For 380 - 480 V 2 2-15 Brake Check
778 × dutytime
units P resistor =
R × 120 Value:
8102 ×
For 380 - 500 V
dutytime Off [0]
units P resistor =
R × 120
For 575 - 600 V 2
943 × dutytime Warning [1]
units P resistor =
R × 120 Trip [2]
This parameter is only active in frequency con- Stop and Trip [3]
verters with an integral dynamic brake. AC brake [4]

Function:
Select type of test and monitoring function to
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring check the connection to the brake resistor, or
Value: whether a brake resistor is present, and then dis-
Off [0] play a warning or an alarm in the event of a fault.
The brake resistor disconnection function is tested
Warning [1]
during power-up, and during braking. However
Trip [2]
the brake IGBT test is performed when there is no
Warning and Trip [3] braking. A warning or trip disconnects the brake
function.
The testing sequence is as follows:

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 53

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

1. The DC link ripple amplitude is measured Function:

for 300 ms without braking. Enter the maximum permissible current when us-
2. The DC link ripple amplitude is measured ing AC brake to avoid overheating of motor wind-
for 300 ms with the brake turned on. ings. The AC brake function is available in Flux
mode only (FC 302 only).
3. If the DC link ripple amplitude while brak-
ing is lower than the DC link ripple ampli-
tude before braking + 1 %: Brake check
2-17 Over-voltage Control
failed, return a warning or alarm.
Value:
4. If the DC link ripple amplitude while brak-
Disabled [0]
ing is higher than the DC link ripple am-
Enabled (not at stop) [1]
plitude before braking + 1 %: Brake
check OK. Enabled [2]

Select Off [0] to monitor the brake resistor and Function:

the brake IGBT for a short-circuit during opera- Over-voltage control (OVC) reduces the risk of the
tion. If a short-circuit occurs, a warning appears. drive tripping due to an over voltage on the DC
Select Warning [1] to monitor the brake resistor link caused by generative power from the load.
and brake IGBT for a short-circuit, and to run a Select Disabled [0] if no OVC is required.
test for brake resistor disconnection during pow- Select Enabled [2] to activate OVC.
er-up. Select Enabled (not at stop) [1] to activate OVC
Select Trip [2] to monitor for a short-circuit or except when using a stop signal to stop the fre-
disconnection of the brake resistor, or a short-cir- quency converter.
cuit of the brake IGBT. If a fault occurs the fre-
quency converter cuts out while displaying an NB!
alarm (trip locked). OVC must not be enabled in hoisting
Select Stop and Trip [3] to monitor for a short- applications.
circuit or disconnection of the brake resistor, or a
short-circuit of the brake IGBT. If a fault occurs 2-2* Mechanical Brake
the frequency converter ramps down to coast and Parameters for controlling operation of an electro-
then trips. A trip lock alarm is displayed. magnetic (mechanical) brake, typically required in
Select AC Brake [4] to monitor for a short-circuit hoisting applications.
or disconnection of the brake resistor, or a short- To control a mechanical brake, a relay output (re-
circuit of the brake IGBT. If a fault occurs the lay 01 or relay 02) or a programmed digital output
frequency converter performs a controlled ramp (terminal 27 or 29) is required. Normally this out-
down. This option is available for FC 302 only. put must be closed during periods when the drive
NB! is unable to ‘hold’ the motor, e.g. due to an ex-
NB!: Remove a warning arising in con- cessive load. Select Mechanical Brake Control [32]
nection with Off [0] or Warning [1] by for applications with an electro-magnetic brake in
cycling the mains supply. The fault par. 5-40 Function Relay, par. 5-30 Terminal 27
must be corrected first. For Off [0] Digital Output, or par. 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital
or Warning [1], the frequency convert- Output. When selecting Mechanical brake control
er keeps running even if a fault is lo- [32], the mechanical brake is closed from start up
cated. until the output current is above the level selected
in par. 2-20 Release Brake Current. During stop,
This parameter is only active in frequency con-
the mechanical brake activates when the speed
verters with an integral dynamic brake.
falls below the level specified in par. 2-21 Activate
Brake Speed [RPM]. If the frequency converter
enters an alarm condition or an over-current or
2-16 AC Brake Max. Current
over-voltage situation, the mechanical brake im-
Value: mediately cuts in. This is also the case during safe
0 - 1000% 100% stop.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

54 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

NB! 2-23 Activate Brake Delay

Protection mode and trip delay fea-
Value:
tures (par. 14-25 and 14-26) may de-
0.0 - 5.0 s 0.0s
lay the activation of the mechanical
brake in an alarm condition. These Function:
features must be disabled in hoisting Enter the brake delay time of the coast after
applications. ramp-down time. The shaft is held at zero speed
with full holding torque. Ensure that the mechan-
ical brake has locked the load before the motor
enters coast mode. See Mechanical Brake Con-
trol section.

2-24 Stop delay

Value:
0.0 - 5.0 s 0.0 s
Function:
Set the time interval from the moment when the
motor is stopped until the brake closes. This pa-
rameter is a part of the stopping function.
2-20 Release Brake Current
Value:
2-25 Brake Release Time
0.00 - par. 16-37 0.00A
Value:
Function:
0.00 - 5.00 s 0.20s
Set the motor current for release of the mechan-
ical brake, when a start condition is present. The Function:
upper limit is specified in par. 16-37 Inv. Max. This value defines the time it takes for the me-
Current. chanical brake to open/ close. This parameter
must act as a time-out when brake feedback is
activated.
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]
Value:
2-26 Torque Ref
0 - 60.000 0RPM
Value:
Function:
-100.00 - 100.00 % 0.00%
Set the motor speed for activation of the mechan-
ical brake, when a stop condition is present. The Function:
upper speed limit is specified in par. 4-53 Warning The value defines the torque applied against the
Speed High. closed mechanical brake, before release

2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] 2-27 Torque Ramp Time

Value: Value:
0 - 5000 0Hz 0.0 - 5.0 s 0.2s

Function: Function:
Set the motor frequency for activation of the me- The value defines the duration of the torque ramp
chanical brake, when a stop condition is present. in clockwise direction.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 55

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

loop [1] control or Process [3] is selected in par.

2-28 Gain Boost Factor 1-00 Configuration Mode.
Value: Select Min. - Max [0] for positive values only.
0.00 - 4.00 1.00 Select -Max - +Max [1] for both positive and neg-
Function: ative values.
When a speed PID-control is connected to the out-
put (flux closed loop) it must be possible to boost
the proportional gain of the control during the Ac- 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit
tivate Brake Delay (par. 2-23). By increasing the Value:
gain, the bump when the motor takes over the None [0]
load from the brake can be reduced. The risk of % [1]
oscillation is very small due to the relatively short
RPM [2]
duration and the low (zero) speed.
Hz [3]
Nm [4]
PPM [5]
1/min [10]
Pulse/s [12]
I/s [20]
I/min [21]
I/h [22]
m3/s [23]
m3/min [24]
m3/h [25]
kg/s [30]
Brake release sequence for hoist mechanical brake con-
trol kg/min [31]
kg/h [32]
Parameters: Reference/
Ramps t/min [33]
t/h [34]
3-** Reference/Reference Limits/Ramps m/s [40]
Parameters for reference handling, definition of m/min [41]
limitations, and configuration of the reaction of m [45]
the frequency converter to changes. ºC [60]
3-0* Reference Limits Mbar [70]
Parameters for setting the reference unit, limits Bar [71]
and ranges. Pa [72]
kPa [73]
3-00 Reference Range
m WG [74]
Value:
kW [80]
Min. - Max [0]
GPM [120]
-Max - +Max [1]
gal/s [121]
Function: gal/min [122]
Select the range of the reference signal and the gal/h [123]
feedback signal. Signal values can be positive on- CFM [124]
ly, or positive and negative. The minimum limit
ft3/s [125]
may have a negative value, unless Speed closed
ft3/min [126]
ft3/h [127]

56 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Ib/s [130] • The choice of configuration in par. 1-00

Ib/min [131] Configuration Mode: for Speed closed
loop [1], RPM; for Torque [2], Nm.
Ib/h [132]
ft/s [140] • The unit selected in par. 3-01 Reference/
Feedback Unit.
ft/min [141]
ft [145]
Ib ft [150] 3-04 Reference Function
ºF [160] Value:
psi [170] Sum [0]
Ib/in2 [171] External/Preset [1]
in WG [172]
ft WG [173] Function:
Select Sum [0] to sum both external and preset
HP [180]
reference sources.
Function: Select External/Preset [1] to use either the preset
Select the unit to be used in Process PID Control or the external reference source.
references and feedbacks. Shift between external and preset via a command
on a digital input.

3-02 Minimum Reference

3-1* References
Value:
Parameters for setting up the reference sources.
-100000.000 – par. 3-03 0.000 Select the preset reference(s). Select Preset ref.
Function: bit 0 / 1 / 2 [16], [17] or [18] for the correspond-
Enter the Minimum Reference. The Minimum Ref- ing digital inputs in parameter group 5.1* Digital
erence is the lowest value obtainable by summing Inputs.
all references.
Minimum Reference is active only when par. 3-00 3-10 Preset Reference
Reference Range is set to Min.- Max. [0].
The Minimum Reference unit matches: Array [8]
Range: 0-7
• The choice of configuration in par 1-00
Configuration Mode: for Speed closed Value:
loop [1], RPM; for Torque [2], Nm.
-100.00 - 100.00 % 0.00%
• The unit selected in par. 3-01 Reference/ Function:
Feedback Unit. Enter up to eight different preset references (0-7)
in this parameter, using array programming. The
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the
3-03 Maximum Reference value RefMAX (par. 3-03 Maximum Reference) If a
Value: RefMIN different from 0 (Par. 3-02 Minimum Ref-
Par. 3-02 - 100000.000 1500.000 erence) is programmed, the preset reference is
Function: calculated as a percentage of the full reference
Enter the Maximum Reference. The Maximum range, i.e. on the basis of the difference between
Reference is the highest value obtainable by sum- RefMAX and RefMIN. Afterwards, the value is added
ming all references. The Maximum Reference unit to RefMIN. When using preset references, select
matches: Preset ref. bit 0 / 1 / 2 [16], [17] or [18] for the
corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
5.1* Digital Inputs.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 57

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Select Linked to Hand / Auto [0] to use the local

reference when in Hand mode; or the remote ref-
erence when in Auto mode.
Select Remote [1] to use the remote reference in
both Hand mode and Auto mode.
Select Local [2] to use the local reference in both
Hand mode and Auto mode.

3-14 Preset Relative Reference

Value:
-200.00 - 200.00 % 0.00%
Function:
The actual reference, X, is increased or decreased
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]
with the percentage Y, set in par.3-14. This re-
Value: sults in the actual reference Z. Actual reference
0.0 - par. 4-14 [Size related] (X) is the sum of the inputs selected in par.3-15,
Reference Source 1, par.3-16, Reference Source
Function: 2, par.3-17, Reference Source 3, and par.8-02,
The jog speed is a fixed output speed at which the Control Word Source.
frequency converter is running when the jog func-
tion is activated.
See also par. 3-80.

3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value

Value:
0.00 - 100.00% 0.00%
Function:
Enter a percentage (relative) value to be either
added to or deducted from the actual reference for
Catch up or Slow down respectively. If Catch up is
selected via one of the digital inputs (par. 5-10 to
par. 5-15), the percentage (relative) value is add-
ed to the total reference. If Slow down is selected
via one of the digital inputs (par. 5-10 to par.
5-15), the percentage (relative) value is deducted
from the total reference. Obtain extended func-
tionality with the DigiPot function. See parameter
group 3-9* Digital Potentiometer.

3-13 Reference Site

Value:
Linked to Hand / Auto [0]
Remote [1]
Local [2]

Function:
Select which reference site to activate.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

58 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Digital pot.meter [20]

3-15 Reference Source 1
Analog input X30-11 [21]
Value:
Analog input X30-12 [22]
No function [0]
Analog input 53 [1] Function:
Analog input 54 [2] Select the reference input to be used for the third
Frequency input 29 (FC 302 only) [7] reference signal. Par. 3-15, 3-16 and 3-17 define
Frequency input 33 [8] up to three different reference signals. The sum of
these reference signals defines the actual refer-
Local bus reference [11]
ence.
Digital pot.meter [20]
Analog input X30-11 [21]
Analog input X30-12 [22] 3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Source
Value:
Function:
No function [0]
Select the reference input to be used for the first
reference signal. Par. 3-15, 3-16 and 3-17 define Analog input 53 [1]
up to three different reference signals. The sum of Analog input 54 [2]
these reference signals defines the actual refer- Frequency input 29 (FC 302 only) [7]
ence. Frequency input 33 [8]
Local bus reference [11]
Digital pot.meter [20]
3-16 Reference Source 2
Analog input X30-11 [21]
Value:
Analog input X30-12 [22]
No function [0]
Analog input 53 [1] Function:
Analog input 54 [2] Select a variable value to be added to the fixed
Frequency input 29 (FC 302 only) [7] value (defined in par. 3-14 Preset Relative Refer-
Frequency input 33 [8] ence). The sum of the fixed and variable values
(labelled Y in the illustration below) is multiplied
Local bus reference [11]
with the actual reference (labelled X in the illus-
Digital pot.meter [20]
tration below). This product is then added to the
Analog input X30-11 [21] actual reference (X+X*Y/100) to give the resul-
Analog input X30-12 [22] tant actual reference.

Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the sec-
ond reference signal. Par. 3-15, 3-16 and 3-17
define up to three different reference signals. The
sum of these reference signals defines the actual
reference. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.

3-17 Reference Source 3

Value: 3-19 Jog Speed
No function [0] Value:
Analog input 53 [1] 0 - par. 4-13 RPM 150RPM
Analog input 54 [2] Function:
Frequency input 29 (FC 302 only) [7] Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which is a
fixed output speed. The frequency converter runs
Frequency input 33 [8]
Local bus reference [11]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 59

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

at this speed when the jog function is activated.

The maximum limit is defined in par. 4-13 Motor 3-40 Ramp 1 Type
Speed High Limit (RPM). Value:
See also par. 3-80. Linear [0]
S-ramp Const Jerk [1]
Ramps S-ramp Const Time [2]
3-4* Ramp 1
For each of four ramps (par. 3-4*, 3-5*, 3-6* and Function:
3-7*) configure the ramp parameters: ramp type, Select the ramp type, depending on requirements
ramping times (duration of acceleration and de- for acceleration/deceleration.
celeration) and level of jerk compensation for S A linear ramp will give constant acceleration dur-
ramps. ing ramping. An S-ramp will give non-linear ac-
celeration, compensating for jerk in the applica-
Start by setting the linear ramping times corre-
tion. Select Const Jerk [1] for acceleration with
sponding to the figures.
lowest possible jerk. Select Const Time [2] for S-
ramp based on the values set in par. 3-41 and
3-42.

NB!
If S-ramp [1] is selected and the ref-
erence during ramping is changed the
ramp time may be prolonged in order
to realize a jerk free movement which
may result in a longer start or stop
time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp
ratios or switching initiators may be
necessary.

If S-ramps are selected then set the level of non- 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time
linear jerk compensation required. Set jerk com-
Value:
pensation by defining the proportion of ramp-up
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related]
and ramp-down times where acceleration and de-
celeration are variable (i.e. increasing or decreas-
Function:
ing). The S-ramp acceleration and deceleration
Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration time
settings are defined as a percentage of the actual
from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed nM,N (par.
ramp time.
1-25). Choose a ramp-up time such that the out-
put current does not exceed the current limit in
par. 4-18 during ramping. The value 0.00 corre-
sponds to 0.01 sec. in speed mode. See ramp-
down time in par. 3-42.
tacc s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM
Par . 3 − 41 =
∆ ref RPM

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

60 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

creases. The larger the percentage value, the

greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus
the lower the torque jerks in the application.

Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

3-47
Start
Value:
1 - 99% 50%
Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time
(par. 3-42) where the deceleration torque increa-
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ses. The larger the percentage value, the greater
the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
Value:
lower the torque jerks in the application.
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related]

Function:
3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the deceleration
time from the rated motor speed nM,N (par. 1-25) Value:
to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that no 1 - 99% 50%
overvoltage arises in the inverter due to regener- Function:
ative operation of the motor, and such that the Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time
generated current does not exceed the current (par. 3-42) where the deceleration torque decrea-
limit set in par. 4-18. The value 0.00 corresponds ses. The larger the percentage value, the greater
to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-up time in par. the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
3-41. lower the torque jerks in the application.
tacc s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM
Par . 3 − 42 =
∆ ref RPM 3-5* Ramp 2
Choosing ramp parameters, see 3-4*.

Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. 3-50 Ramp 2 Type

3-45
Start Value:
Value: Linear [0]
1 - 99% 50% S-ramp Const Jerk [1]
Function: S-ramp Const Time [2]
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
(par. 3-41) in which the acceleration torque in- Function:
creases. The larger the percentage value, the Select the ramp type, depending on requirements
greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus for acceleration/deceleration. A linear ramp will
the lower the torque jerks occurring in the appli- give constant acceleration during ramping. An S-
cation. ramp will give non-linear acceleration, compen-
sating for jerk in the application. Select Const Jerk
[1] for acceleration with lowest possible jerk. Se-
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End lect Const Time [2] for S-ramp based on the val-
Value: ues set in par. 3-51 and 3-52
1 - 99% 50% NB!
Function: If S-ramp [1] is selected and the ref-
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time erence during ramping is changed the
(par. 3-41) in which the acceleration torque de- ramp time may be prolonged in order
to realize a jerk free movement which

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 61

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus

may result in a longer start or stop
the lower the torque jerks in the application.
time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp
ratios or switching initiators may be
3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
necessary.
Value:
1 - 99% 50%
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp up Time Function:
Value: Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related] (par. 3-51) in which the acceleration torque de-
creases. The larger the percentage value, the
Function: greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus
Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration time the lower the torque jerks in the application.
from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed nM,N (par.
1-25). Choose a ramp-up time such that the out-
put current does not exceed the current limit in Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-57
par. 4-18 during ramping. The value 0.00 corre- Start
sponds to 0.01 sec. in speed mode. See ramp- Value:
down time in par. 3-52. 1 - 99% 50%
tacc s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM Function:
Par . 3 − 51 = Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time
∆ ref RPM
(par. 3-52) where the deceleration torque increa-
ses The larger the percentage value, the greater
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp down Time the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.
Value:
0.01 - 3600.00 s. [Size related]

3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Function:
Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the deceleration Value:
time from the rated motor speed nM,N (par. 1-25) 1 - 99% 50%
to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that no Function:
over-voltage arises in the inverter due to regen- Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time
erative operation of the motor, and such that the (par. 3-52) where the deceleration torque decrea-
generated current does not exceed the current ses. The larger the percentage value, the greater
limit set in par. 4-18. The value 0.00 corresponds the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-up time in par. lower the torque jerks in the application.
3-51.
tdec s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM 3-6* Ramp 3
Par . 3 − 52 =
∆ ref RPM Configure ramp parameters, see 3-4*.

3-60 Ramp 3 Type

Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Value:
3-55
Start Linear [0]
Value: S-ramp Const Jerk [1]
1 - 99% 50% S-ramp Const Time [2]
Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time Function:
(par. 3-51) in which the acceleration torque in- Select the ramp type, depending on requirements
creases. The larger the percentage value, the for acceleration and deceleration. A linear ramp

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

62 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

will give constant acceleration during ramping. An Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-65
S-ramp will give non-linear acceleration, compen- Start
sating for jerk in the application. Select Const Jerk Value:
[1] for acceleration with lowest possible jerk. Se- 1 - 99% 50%
lect Const Time [2] for S-ramp based on the val-
Function:
ues set in par. 3-61 and 3-62
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
NB! (par. 3-61) in which the acceleration torque in-
If S-ramp [1] is selected and the ref- creases. The larger the percentage value, the
erence during ramping is changed the greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus
ramp time may be prolonged in order the lower the torque jerks in the application.
to realize a jerk free movement which
may result in a longer start or stop
time. 3-66 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp Value:
ratios or switching initiators may be 1 - 99% 50%
necessary.
Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
(par. 3-61) in which the acceleration torque de-
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time
creases. The larger the percentage value, the
Value: greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related] the lower the torque jerks in the application.

Function:
Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration time Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed nM,N (par. 3-67
Start
1-25). Choose a ramp-up time such that the out-
Value:
put current does not exceed the current limit in
1 - 99% 50%
par. 4-18 during ramping. The value 0.00 corre-
sponds to 0.01 sec. in speed mode. See ramp- Function:
down time in par. 3-62. Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time
(par. 3-62) where the deceleration torque increa-
ses. The larger the percentage value, the greater
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.
Value:
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related]

3-68 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Function:
Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the deceleration Value:
time from the rated motor speed nM,N (par. 1-25) 1 - 99% 50%
to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that no Function:
over-voltage arises in the inverter due to regen- Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time
erative operation of the motor, and such that the (par. 3-62) where the deceleration torque decrea-
generated current does not exceed the current ses. The larger the percentage value, the greater
limit set in par. 4-18. The value 0.00 corresponds the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-up time in par. lower the torque jerks in the application.
3-61.
tdec s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM
Par . 3 − 62 =
∆ ref RPM

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 63

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

3-7* Ramp 4 Function:

Configure ramp parameters, see 3-4*. Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the deceleration
time from the rated motor speed nM,N (par. 1-25)
3-70 Ramp 4 Type to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that no
Value: over-voltage arises in the inverter due to regen-
Linear [0] erative operation of the motor, and such that the
generated current does not exceed the current
S-ramp Const Jerk [1]
limit set in par. 4-18. The value 0.00 corresponds
S-ramp Const Time [2]
to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-up time in par.
3-71.
Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on requirements tdec s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM
Par . 3 − 72 =
for acceleration and deceleration. A linear ramp ∆ ref RPM
will give constant acceleration during ramping. An
S-ramp will give non-linear acceleration, compen-
sating for jerk in the application. Select Const Jerk Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-75
[1] for acceleration with lowest possible jerk. Se- Start
lect Const Time [2] for S-ramp based on the val- Value:
ues set in par. 3-71 and 3-72 1 - 99% 50%
NB! Function:
If S-ramp [1] is selected and the ref- Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
erence during ramping is changed the (par. 3-71) in which the acceleration torque in-
ramp time may be prolonged in order creases. The larger the percentage value, the
to realize a jerk free movement which greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus
may result in a longer start or stop the lower the torque jerks in the application.
time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp
ratios or switching initiators may be 3-76 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
necessary. Value:
1 - 99% 50%
Function:
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
Value: (par. 3-71) in which the acceleration torque de-
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related] creases. The larger the percentage value, the
greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus
Function: the lower the torque jerks in the application.
Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration time
from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed nM,N (par.
1-25). Choose a ramp-up time such that the out- Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
put current does not exceed the current limit in 3-77
Start
par. 4-18 during ramping. The value 0.00 corre-
Value:
sponds to 0.01 sec. in speed mode. See ramp-
1 - 99% 50%
down time in par. 3-72.
Function:
tacc s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM
Par . 3 − 71 = Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time
∆ ref RPM (par. 3-72) where the deceleration torque increa-
ses. The larger the percentage value, the greater
the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time lower the torque jerks in the application.
Value:
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

64 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End Function:

Value: Enter the quick–stop ramp-down time, i.e. the de-
1 - 99% 50% celeration time from the rated motor speed to 0
Function: RPM. Ensure that no resultant over-voltage will
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time arise in the inverter due to regenerative operation
(par. 3-72) where the deceleration torque decrea- of the motor required to achieve the given ramp-
ses. The larger the percentage value, the greater down time. Ensure also that the generated current
the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the required to achieve the given ramp-down time
lower the torque jerks in the application. does not exceed the current limit (set in par.
4-18). Quick-stop is activated by means of a sig-
nal on a selected digital input, or via the serial
3-8* Other Ramps
communication port.
Configure parameters for special ramps e.g. Jog
or Quick Stop.

3-80 Jog Ramp Time

Value:
0.01 - 3600.00 s [Size related]

Function:
Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the acceleration/de-
celeration time between 0 RPM and the rated mo-
tor frequency nM,N (set in par. 1-25 Motor Nominal
Speed). Ensure that the resultant output current
required for the given jog ramp time does not ex- tQstop s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM
ceed the current limit in par. 4-18. The jog ramp Par . 3 − 81 =
∆ jog ref ( par . 3 − 19) RPM
time starts upon activation of a jog signal via the
control panel, a selected digital input, or the serial
communication port. 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
The digital potentiometer function allows the user
to increase or decrease the actual reference by
adjusting the set-up of the digital inputs using the
functions Increase, Decrease or Clear. To activate
the function, at least one digital input must be set
up to Increase or Decrease.

t jog s x n M , N ( par . 1 − 25) RPM

Par . 3 − 80 =
∆ log speed ( par . 3 − 19) RPM

3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time

Value:
0.01 - 3600.00 s 3s

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 65

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

3-90 Step Size

3-94 Minimum Limit
Value:
Value:
0.01 - 200.00% 0.10%
-200 - 200 % -100%
Function:
Enter the increment size required for INCREASE/ Function:
DECREASE, as a percentage of the nominal speed Set the minimum permissible value for the resul-
set in par. 1-25. If INCREASE/ DECREASE is acti- tant reference. This is advisable if the Digital Po-
vated the resulting reference will be increased / tentiometer is used for fine tuning of the resulting
decreased by the amount set in this parameter. reference.

3-91 Ramp Time 3-95 Ramp Delay

Value: Value:

0.000 - 3600.00 s 0.000 - 3600.00 s 1.000s

1.00s
Function: Function:
Enter the ramp time, i.e. the time for adjustment Enter the delay required from activation of the
of the reference from 0% to 100% of the specified digital potentiometer function until the frequency
digital potentiometer function (INCREASE, DE- converter starts to ramp the reference. With a de-
CREASE or CLEAR). lay of 0 ms, the reference starts to ramp as soon
If INCREASE/ DECREASE is activated for longer as INCREASE/ DECREASE is activated. See also
than the ramp delay period specified in par. 3-95 par. 3-91 Ramp Time.
the actual reference will be ramped up / down ac-
cording to this ramp time. The ramp time is de-
fined as the time used to adjust the reference by
the step size specified in par. 3-90 Step Size.

3-92 Power Restore

Value:
Off [0]
On [1]

Function:
Select Off [0] to reset the Digital Potentiometer
reference to 0% after power up.
Select On [1] to restore the most recent Digital
Potentiometer reference at power up.

3-93 Maximum Limit

Value:
-200 - 200 % 100%
Function:
Set the maximum permissible value for the resul-
tant reference. This is advisable if the Digital Po-
tentiometer is used for fine tuning of the resulting
reference.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

66 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Limits/Warn- Function:

ings Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The Mo-
tor Speed Low Limit can be set to correspond to
4-** Limits and Warnings the minimum output frequency of the motor shaft.
Parameter group for configuring limits and warn- The Motor Speed Low Limit must not exceed the
ings. setting in par. 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

4-1* Motor Limits

Define torque, current and speed limits for the 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
motor, and the reaction of the frequency convert-
Value:
er when the limits are exceeded.
Par. 4-11 - 60.000 3600. RPM
A limit may generate a message on the display. A
warning will always generate a message on the Function:
display or on the fieldbus. A monitoring function Enter the maximum limit for motor speed. The
may initiate a warning or a trip, upon which the Motor Speed High Limit can be set to correspond
frequency converter will stop and generate an to the manufacturer’s maximum rated motor
alarm message. speed. The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed
the setting in par. 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
4-10 Motor Speed Direction [RPM].

Value: NB!
Clockwise [0] Max. output frequency cannot exceed
Counter clockwise [1] 10% of the inverter switching frequen-
cy (par. 14-01).
Both directions [2]

Function:
Select the motor speed direction(s) required. Use
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing.
When par. 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to Proc- Value:
ess [3], par. 4-10 is set to Clockwise [0] as de- 0 - 1000 Hz [50 Hz]
fault. The setting in par. 4-10 does not limit
options for setting par.4-13. Function:
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- Enter the maximum limit for motor speed. The
tor is running. Motor Speed High Limit can be set to correspond
to the manufacturer’s recommended maximum
frequency of the motor shaft. The Motor Speed
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] High Limit must exceed the setting in par. 4-12
Value: Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]. Only par. 4-11 or
4-12 will be displayed depending on other param-
0 - par. 4-13 0RPM
eters set in the Main Menu and depending on de-
Function:
fault settings dependant on global geographical
Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The Mo-
location.
tor Speed Low Limit can be set to correspond to
the manufacturer’s recommended minimum mo- NB!
tor speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit must not Max. output frequency cannot exceed
exceed the setting in par. 4-13 Motor Speed High 10% of the inverter switching frequen-
Limit [RPM]. cy (par. 14-01).

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
Value: Value:
0 - par. 4-14 0Hz 0.0 - Variable Limit % 160.0 %

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 67

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: to set par. 4-18 lower than par. 4-16 and 4-17
Sets the torque limit for motor operation. The tor- (Torque Limits)
que limit is active in the speed range up to the
rated motor speed (par. 1-25). To protect the mo-
tor from reaching the stalling torque, the default 4-19 Max Output Frequency
setting is 1.6 x the rated motor torque (calculated Value:
value). If a setting in par. 1-00 to par. 1-26 is 0.0 - 1000.0 Hz 132.0Hz
changed, par. 4-16 to 4-18 are not automatically Function:
reset to the default settings. Provides a final limit on the drive output frequency
for improved safety in applications where you
want to avoid accidental over-speeding. This limit
is final in all configurations (independent of the
setting in par. 1-00).

NB!
Max. output frequency cannot exceed
10% of the inverter switching frequen-
cy (par. 14-01).

Par. 4-19 cannot be adjusted while the motor is

running.
Changing par. 4-16 Torque Limit Motor
Mode when par. 1-00 is set to Speed
open loop [0], par. 1-66 Min Current at 4-20 Torque Limit Factor SourceOption
Low Speed is automatically readjus- Value:
ted. No function [0]
Analog input 53 [2]
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode
Analog input 53 inv [4]
Value:
Analog input 54 [6]
0.0 - Variable Limit % 100.0 %
Analog input 54 inv [8]
Function:
Analog input X30-11 [10]
Sets the torque limit for generator mode opera-
Analog input X30-11 inv [12]
tion. The torque limit is active in the speed range
up to the rated motor speed (par. 1-25). See il- Analog input X30-12 [14]
lustration for par. 4-16 as well as par. 14-25 for Analog input X30-12 inv [16]
further details.
Function:
Select an analog input for scaling the settings in
4-18 Current Limit par. 4-16 and 4-17 from 0% to 100% (or inverse).
The signal levels corresponding to 0% and 100%
Value:
are defined in the analog input scaling, e.g. par.
0.0 - Variable Limit % 160.0 %
group 6-1*. This parameter is only active when
Function: par. 1-00 Configuration Mode is in Speed Open
Sets the current limit for motor operation. To pro- Loop or Speed Closed Loop.
tect the motor from reaching the stalling torque,
the default setting is 1.6 x the rated motor torque
(calculated value). If a setting in par. 1-00 to par. 4-21 Speed Limit Factor SourceOption
1-26 is changed, par. 4-16 to par. 4-18 are not
Value:
automatically reset to the default settings.
No function [0]
To obtain maximum output torque and prevent
the motor from stalling, it is recommendable not Analog input 53 [2]
Analog input 53 inv [4]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

68 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Analog input 54 [6]

Analog input 54 inv [8]
Analog input X30-11 [10]
Analog input X30-11 inv [12]
Analog input X30-12 [14]
Analog input X30-12 inv [16]

Function:
Select an analog input for scaling the settings in
par. 4-19 from 0% to 100% (or inverse). The sig-
nal levels corresponding to 0% and 100% are de-
fined in the analog input scaling, e.g. par. group
6-1*. This parameter is only active when par.
1-00 Configuration Mode is in Torque Mode.

4-3* Motor Feedback Monitoring 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout

The parameter group includes monitoring and Value:
handling of motor feedback devices as encoders, 0.00 - 60.00 sec 0.05 s
resolvers etc.
Function:
Set the timeout value allowing the speed error set
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function
in par. 4-31 to be exceeded.
Value:
Disabled [0]
4-5* Adjustable Warnings
Warning [1]
Define adjustable warning limits for current,
Trip [2] speed, reference and feedback. Warnings are
shown on the display, programmed output or se-
Function:
rial bus.
Select which reaction the frequency converter
should take in the case a feedback fault is detec- Warnings are shown on display, programmed out-
ted. The selected action will take place if the feed- put or serial bus.
back signal differs from the output speed with
more than specified in par. 4-31 during the time
set in par. 4-32.

4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error

Value:
1-600 RPM 300RPM
Function:
Select the max allowed tracking error in speed
from the calculated and the actual mechanical
shaft output speed.

4-50 Warning Current Low

Value:
0.00 - par. 4-51 0.00A

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 69

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Function:
Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current falls Enter the lower reference limit. When the actual
below this limit, the display reads Current Low. reference falls below this limit, the display indi-
The signal outputs can be programmed to produce cates Ref Low. The signal outputs can be pro-
a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay grammed to produce a status signal on terminal
output 01 or 02. Refer to the drawing in this sec- 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or 02.
tion.

4-55 Warning Reference High

4-51 Warning Current High Value:
Value: Par. 4-54 - 999999.999 999999.999
Par. 4-50 - par. 16-37 par. 16-37 A Function:
Function: Enter the upper reference limit. When the actual
Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor current ex- reference exceeds this limit, the display reads Ref
ceeds this limit, the display reads Current High. High. The signal outputs can be programmed to
The signal outputs can be programmed to produce produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and
a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay on relay output 01 or 02.
output 01 or 02. Refer to the drawing in this sec-
tion.
4-56 Warning Feedback Low
Value:
4-52 Warning Speed Low -999999.999 - par. 4-57 -999999.999
Value: Function:
0 - par. 4-13 0 RPM Enter the lower feedback limit. When the feedback
Function: falls below this limit, the display reads Feedb Low.
Enter the nLOW value. When the motor speed ex- The signal outputs can be programmed to produce
ceeds this limit, the display reads Speed Low. The a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay
signal outputs can be programmed to produce a output 01 or 02.
status signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
4-57 Warning Feedback High
Value:
4-53 Warning Speed High Par. 4-56 - 999999.999 999999.999
Value: Function:
Par. 4-52 - par. 4-13 par. 4-13 RPM Enter the upper feedback limit. When the feed-
Function: back exceeds this limit, the display reads Feedb
Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor speed ex- High. The signal outputs can be programmed to
ceeds this limit, the display reads Speed High. The produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and
signal outputs can be programmed to produce a on relay output 01 or 02.
status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay
output 01 or 02. Programme the upper signal limit
of the motor speed, nHIGH, within the normal work- 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function
ing range of the frequency converter. Refer to the Value:
drawing in this section. Off [0]
On [1]

4-54 Warning Reference Low Function:

Value: Select On, to display an alarm in the event of a
-999999.999 - par. 4-55 -999999.999 missing motor phase. Select Off, for no alarm in

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

70 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

the event of a missing motor phase. However, if 0 - par. 4-14 0 Hz

the motor runs on only two phases, it can be dam- Function:
aged by overheating. Retaining the On setting is Some systems call for avoiding certain output
therefore strongly recommended. speeds due to resonance problems in the system.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- Enter the upper limits of the speeds to be avoided.
tor is running.

4-6* Speed Bypass

Define the Speed Bypass areas for the ramps.
Some systems call for avoiding certain output fre-
quencies or speeds, due to resonance problems in
the system. A maximum of four frequency or
speed ranges can be avoided.

4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]

Array [4]

Value:
0 - par. 4-13 0 RPM
Function:
Some systems call for avoiding certain output
speeds due to resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds to be avoided.

4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]

Array [4]

Value:
0 - par. 4-14 Hz 0 Hz
Function:
Some systems call for avoiding certain output
speeds due to resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds to be avoided.

4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM]

Array [4]

Value:
0 - par. 4-13 0RPM
Function:
Some systems call for avoiding certain output
speeds due to resonance problems in the system.
Enter the upper limits of the speeds to be avoided.

4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

Array [4]

Value:

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 71

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Digital In/Out Output [1]

5-** Digital In/Out Function:

Select Input [0] to define terminal 29 as a digital
Parameter group for configuring the digital input
input.
and output.
Select Output [1] to define terminal 29 as a digital
5-0* Digital I/O Mode output.
Parameters for configuring the IO mode. NPN/PNP This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
and setting up IO to Input or Output. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.
5-00 Digital I/O Mode
Value: 5-1* Digital Inputs
PNP [0] Parameters for configuring the input functions for
NPN [1] the input terminals.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various
Function: functions in the frequency converter. All digital in-
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are puts can be set to the following functions:
pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or
Digital input function Select Terminal
NPN systems. No operation [0] All *term 32, 33
Select PNP [0] systems for action on positive di- Reset [1] All
Coast inverse [2] All *term 27
rectional pulses (↕). PNP systems are pulled down Coast and reset inverse [3] All
to GND. Quick stop inverse [4] All
DC-brake inverse [5] All
Select NPN [1] systems for action on negative di- Stop inverse [6] All
rectional pulses (↕). NPN systems are pulled up to Start [8] All *term 18
Latched start [9] All
+ 24 V, internally in the frequency converter. Reversing [10] All *term 19
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- Start reversing [11] All
Enable start forward [12] All
tor is running. Enable start reverse [13] All
Jog [14] All *term 29
NB! Preset reference on [15] All
Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
When changing this parameter, a pow- Preset ref bit 1 [17] All
er cycle must be carried out before the Preset ref bit 2 [18] All
Freeze reference [19] All
parameter change is active. Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
Speed down [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
Precise stop inverse [26] 18, 19
Value: Precises start, stop [27] 18, 19
Catch up [28] All
Input [0] Slow down [29] All
Counter input [30] 29, 33
Output [1] Pulse input [32] 29, 33
Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Ramp bit 1 [35] All
Function: Mains failure inverse [36] All
Select Input [0] to define terminal 27 as a digital Latched precise start [40] 18, 19
Latched precise stop in- [41] 18, 19
input. verse
Select Output [1] to define terminal 27 as a digital DigiPot Increase [55] All
DigiPot Decrease [56] All
output. DigiPot Clear [57] All
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
tor is running. Reset Counter A [62] All
Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
Reset Counter B [65] All
Mech. Brake Feedb. [70] All
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode Mech. Brake Feedb. Inv. [71] All
Value: All = Terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33, X30/2,
Input [0] X30/3, X30/4. X30/ are the terminals on MCB
101.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

72 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Terminal 29 is available in FC 302 only. • Start [8] (Default Digital input 18): Se-
lect start for a start/stop command. Logic
Functions dedicated to only one digital input are
stated in the associated parameter. ‘1’ = start, logic ‘0’ = stop.
• Latched start [9]: The motor starts, if a
All digital inputs can be programmed to these
functions: pulse is applied for min. 2 ms. The motor
stops when Stop inverse is activated.
• No operation [0]: The frequency con-
verter will not react to signals transmitted • Reversing [10]: (Default Digital input
19). Change the direction of motor shaft
to the terminal.
rotation. Select Logic ‘1’ to reverse. The
• Reset [1]: Reset the frequency converter reversing signal only changes the direc-
after a TRIP/ALARM. Not all alarms can be tion of rotation. It does not activate the
reset. start function. Select both directions in
• Coast inverse [2] (Default Digital input par. 4-10 Motor Speed Direction. The
27): Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). function is not active in Speed closed
The frequency converter leaves the motor loop [1] or Torque [2] control in par. 1-00
in free mode. Logic ‘0’ => coasting stop. Configuration Mode.

• Coast and reset inverse [3]: Reset and • Start reversing [11]: Use for start/stop
coasting stop Inverted input (NC). The and for reversing on the same wire. Sig-
frequency converter leaves the motor in nals on start are not allowed at the same
free mode and resets the drive. Logic ‘0’ time.
=> coasting stop and reset. • Enable start forward [12]: Use if the
• Quick stop inverse [4]: Inverted input motor shaft must rotate clockwise at
(NC). Generate a stop in accordance with start.
the quick-stop ramp time set in par. 3-81. • Enable start reverse [13]: Use if the
When the motor stops, the shaft is in free motor shaft must rotate counter-clock-
mode. Logic ‘0’ => Quick-stop. wise at start.
• DC-brake inverse [5]: Inverted input • Jog [14] (Default Digital input 29): Use
for DC braking (NC). Stops the motor by to activate jog speed. See par. 3-11.
energizing it with a DC current for a cer-
tain time period. See par. 2-01 to par. • Preset reference on [15]: Use for shift-
ing between external reference and pre-
2-03. The function is only active when the
set reference. It is assumed that External/
value in par. 2-02 is different from 0. Log-
ic ’0’ => DC braking. preset [1] has been selected in par. 3-04.
Logic '0' = external reference active; logic
• Stop inverse [6]:Stop Inverted func- '1' = one of the eight preset references is
tion. Generate a stop function when the active.
selected terminal goes from logical level
‘1’ to ‘0’. The stop is performed according • Preset ref bit 0 [16]: Preset ref. bit 0,1,
to the selected ramp time (par. 3-42, par. and 2 enables a choice between one of the
eight preset references according to the
3-52, par. 3-62, par. 3-72).
table below.
NB!
• Preset ref bit 1 [17]: Same as Preset ref
When the frequency converter is at the
bit 0 [16].
torque limit and has received a stop
command, it may not stop by itself. To • Preset ref bit 2 [18]: Same as Preset ref
ensure that the frequency converter bit 0 [16].
stops, configure a digital output to
Torque limit & stop [27] and connect
this digital output to a digital input that
is configured as coast.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 73

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Preset ref. bit 2 1 0

• Set-up select bit 0 [23] : Select Set-up
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0 select bit 0 or Select Set-up select bit 1 to
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1 select one of the four set-ups. Set par.
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
• Set-up select bit 1 [24] (Default Digital
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0 input 32): Same as Set-up select bit 0
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1 [23].

• Freeze ref [19]: Freeze the actual ref- • Precise stop inv. [26]:Prolong the stop
erence. The frozen reference is now the signal to give a precise stop independent
point of enable/condition for Speed up of speed.
and Speed down to be used. If Speed up/ Send an inverted stop signal when the
down is used, the speed change always precise stop function is activated in par.
follows ramp 2 (par. 3-51 and 3-52) in the 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
range 0 - par. 3-03 Maximum Reference. Precise stop inverse function is available
for terminals 18 or 19.
• Freeze output [20]: Freeze the actual
motor frequency (Hz). The frozen motor • Precise start, stop [27]: Use when Pre-
frequency is now the point of enable/con- cise ramp stop [0] is selected in par
dition for Speed up and Speed down to be 1-83 Precise stop function.
used. If Speed up/down is used, the
speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.
3-51 and 3-52) in the range 0 - par. 1-23
Motor Frequency.

NB!
When Freeze output is active, the fre-
quency converter cannot be stopped
via a low ‘start [8]’ signal. Stop the
frequency converter via a terminal • Catch up [28]: Select Catch up/Slow
programmed for Coasting inverse [2] down to increase or reduce the reference
or Coast and reset, inverse. value set in par. 3-12.
• Speed up [21]: Select Speed up and • Slow down [29]: Same as Catch up
Speed down if digital control of the up/ [28].
down speed is desired (motor potentiom-
• Counter input [30]: Select Counter in-
eter). Activate this function by selecting
put if you want to use the Precise stop
either Freeze reference or Freeze output.
function in par. 1-83 as Counter stop or
When Speed up/ down is activated for less
speed compensated counter stop with or
than 400 msec. the resulting reference
without reset. The counter value must be
will be increased/ decreased by 0.1 %. If
set in par. 1-84.
Speed up/ down is activated for more
than 400 msec. the resulting reference • Pulse input [32]: Select Pulse input
will follow the setting in ramping up/ down when using a pulse sequence as either
parameter 3-x1/ 3-x2. reference or feedback. Scaling is done in
par. group 5-5*.
Shut down Catch up • Ramp bit 0 [34]: Ramp bit 0 and 1 en-
Unchanged speed 0 0
ables a choice between one of the 4 ramps
Reduced by %-value 1 0
Increased by %-value 0 1 availble, according to the table below.
Reduced by %-value 1 1
• Ramp bit 1 [35]: Same as Ramp bit 0.
• Speed down [22]: Same as Speed up
[21].

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

74 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Preset ramp bit 1 0

5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input
Ramp 1 0 0 Value:
Ramp 2 0 1
Ramp 3 1 0 Start [8]
Ramp 4 1 1
Function:
• Mains failure inverse [36]: Select to Select the function from the available digital input
activate par. 14-10 Mains Failure. Mains range.
failure inverse is active in the Logic .0. sit-
uation.
• Latched Precise Stop inverse [41]: 5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input
Send a latched stop signal when the pre- Value:
cise stop function is activated in par. 1-83 Reversing [10]
Precise Stop Function. The Latched Pre-
cise stop inverse function is available for Function:
terminals 18 or 19. Select the function from the available digital input
• DigiPot Increase [55]: Use the input as range.
an INCREASE signal to the Digital Poten-
tiometer function described in parameter
group 3-9* 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Value:
• DigiPot Decrease [56]: Use the input as
Coast inverse [2]
a DECREASE signal to the Digital Potenti-
ometer function described in parameter
Function:
group 3-9*
Select the function from the available digital input
• DigiPot Clear [57]: Use the input to range.
CLEAR the Digital Potentiometer refer-
ence described in parameter group 3-9*
• Counter A [60]: (Terminal 29 or 33 on- 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
ly) Input for increment counting in the Value:
SLC counter. Jog [14]
• Counter A [61]: (Terminal 29 or 33 on- Counter A (up) [60]
ly) Input for decrement counting in the Counter A (down) [61]
SLC counter. Counter B (up) [63]
• Reset Counter A [62]: Input for reset of Counter B (down) [64]
counter A.
Function:
• Counter B [63]: (Terminal 29 or 33 on-
Select the function from the available digital input
ly) Input for increment counting in the
range and the additional options [60], [61], [63]
SLC counter.
and [64]. Counters are used in Smart Logic Con-
• Counter B [64]: (Terminal 29 or 33 on- trol functions. This parameter is available for FC
ly) Input for decrement counting in the 302 only.
SLC counter.
• Reset Counter B [65]: Input for reset of
counter B. 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input

• Mech. Brake Feedback [70]: Brake Value:

feedback for hoisting applications No operation [0]

• Mech. Brake Feedback inv. [71]: In-

Function:
verted brake feedback for hoisting appli-
Select the function from the available digital input
cations
range.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 75

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input Function:

Value: Select Safe Stop Alarm [1] to get the drive coas-
No operation [0] ted when safe stop is activated and manual reset
Counter A (up) [60] from LCP, digital input or fieldbus is used.
Select Safe Stop Warning [3] to get the drive
Counter A (down) [61]
coasted when safe stop is activated (term 37 off).
Counter B (up) [63]
When safe stop circuit is reestablished, the drive
Counter B (down) [64] will continue without manual reset.

Function:
Select the function from the available digital input 5-3* Digital Outputs
range and the additional options [60], [61], [63] Parameters for configuring the output functions
and [64]. Counters are used in Smart Logic Con- for the output terminals. The 2 solid-state digital
trol functions. outputs are common for terminals 27 and 29. Set
the I/O function for terminal 27 in par. 5-01 Ter-
minal 27 Mode, and set the I/O function for ter-
5-16 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input minal 29 in par. 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. These
parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
Value:
running.
*No operation [0]
No operation [0]
Function: Control ready [1]
This parameter is active when option module MCB Drive ready [2]
101 is installed in the frequency converter. Drive ready / remote control [3]
Enable / no warning [4]
Follow the function stated in 5-1*
VLT running [5]
Running / no warning [6]
Run in range / no warning [7]
5-17 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input Run on reference / no warning [8]
Alarm [9]
Value:
Alarm or warning [10]
*No operation [0] At torque limit [11]
Out of current range [12]
Function: Below current, low [13]
This parameter is active when option module MCB Above current, high [14]
Out of range [15]
101 is installed in the frequency converter. Below speed, low [16]
Follow the function stated in 5-1* Above speed, high [17]
Out of feedback range [18]
Below feedback low [19]
Above feedback high [20]
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input
Thermal warning [21]
Value: Ready, no thermal warning [22]
*No operation [0] Remote, ready, no thermal warning [23]
Ready, no over-/ under voltage [24]
Reverse [25]
Function:
Bus OK [26]
This parameter is active when option module MCB Torque limit and stop [27]
101 is installed in the frequency converter. Brake, no brake warning [28]
Follow the function stated in 5-1* Brake ready, no fault [29]
Brake fault (IGBT) [30]
Relay 123 [31]
Mechanical brake control [32]
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop Safe stop activated (FC 302 only) [33]
Value: Out of ref range [40]
Below reference low [41]
Safe Stop Alarm [1]
Above reference high [42]
Safe Stop Auto Reset [3] Bus Ctrl [45]
Bus Ctrl On at timeout [46]
Bus Ctrl Off at timeout [47]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

76 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

MCO controlled [51] • Run on reference / no warning [8]:

Pulse output [55] The motor runs at reference speed.
Comparator 0 [60]
Comparator 1 [61] • Alarm [9]: An alarm activates the out-
Comparator 2 [62] put. There are no warnings.
Comparator 3 [63]
Comparator 4 [64] • Alarm or warning [10]: An alarm or a
Comparator 5 [65] warning activates the output.
Logic Rule 0 [70]
• At torque limit [11]: The torque limit
Logic Rule 1 [71]
Logic Rule 2 [72] set in par. 4-16 or par. 1-17 has been ex-
Logic Rule 3 [73] ceeded.
Logic Rule 4 [74]
Logic Rule 5 [75] • Out of current range [12]: The motor
SL Digital Output A [80] current is outside the range set in par.
SL Digital Output B [81] 4-18.
SL Digital Output C [82]
SL Digital Output D [83] • Below current, low [13]: The motor
SL Digital Output E [84] current is lower than set in par. 4-50.
SL Digital Output F [85]
• Above current, high [14]: The motor
Local reference active [120]
Remote reference active [121] current is higher than set in par. 4-51.
No alarm [122] • Out of range [15]: The output frequen-
Start command active [123]
cy is outside the frequency range set in
Running reverse [124]
Drive in hand mode [125] any limit parameter.
Drive in auto mode [126] • Below speed, low[16]: The output
The digital outputs can be programmed with these speed is lower than the setting in par.
functions: 4-52.
• No operation [0]: Default for all digital • Above speed, high [17]: The output
outputs and relay outputs speed is higher than the setting in par.
4-53.
• Control ready [1]: The control board re-
ceives supply voltage. • Out of feedback range [18]: The feed-
back is outside the range set in par. 4-56
• Drive ready [2]: The frequency convert-
and 4-57.
er is ready for operation and applies a
supply signal on the control board. • Below feedback low [19]: The feed-
back is below the limit set in par. 4-56
• Drive ready / remote control [3]: The
Warning Feedback Low.
frequency converter is ready for operation
and is in Auto On mode. • Above feedback high [20]: The feed-
back is above the limit set in par. 4-57
• Enable / no warning [4]: The frequen-
Warning Feedback High.
cy converter is ready for operation. No
start or stop command is been given • Thermal warning [21]: The thermal
(start/disable). There are no warnings. warning turns on when the temperature
exceeds the limit in the motor, the fre-
• VLT running [5]: The motor is running.
quency converter, the brake resistor, or
• Running / no warning [6]: The output the thermistor.
speed is higher than the speed set in par.
• Ready, no thermal warning [22]: The
1-81Min Speed for Function at Stop
frequency converter is ready for operation
[RPM]. The motor is running and there are
and there is no over-temperature warn-
no warnings.
ing.
• Run in range / no warning [7]: The
• Remote, ready, no thermal warning
motor is running within the programmed
[23]: The frequency converter is ready
current and speed ranges set in par. 4-50
for operation and is in Auto On mode.
to par. 4-53. There are no warnings.
There is no over-temperature warning.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 77

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

• Ready, no over-/ under voltage [24]: • MCO controlled [51]

The frequency converter is ready for op-
• Pulse output [55]
eration and the mains voltage is within
the specified voltage range (see General • Comparator 0 [60]: See par. group
Specifications section). 13-1*. If Comparator 0 is evaluated as
TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
• Reverse [25]:Reversing. Logic ‘1’ = re-
it will be low.
lay activated, 24 V DC when CW rotation
of the motor. Logic ‘0’ = relay not activa- • Comparator 1 [61]: See par. group
ted, no signal, when CCW rotation of the 13-1*. If Comparator 1 is evaluated as
motor. TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
it will be low.
• Bus OK [26]: Active communication (no
time-out) via the serial communication • Comparator 2 [62]: See par. group
port. 13-1*. If Comparator 2 is evaluated as
TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
• Torque limit & stop [27]: Use in per- it will be low.
forming a coasting stop and in torque limit
condition. If the frequency converter has • Comparator 3 [63]: See par. group
received a stop signal and is at the torque 13-1*. If Comparator 3 is evaluated as
limit, the signal is Logic ‘0’. TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
it will be low.
• Brake, no brake warning [28]: The
brake is active and there are no warnings. • Comparator 4 [64]: See par. group
13-1*. If Comparator 4 is evaluated as
• Brake ready, no fault [29]: The brake
TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
is ready for operation and there are no
it will be low.
faults.
• Comparator 5 [65]: See par. group
• Brake fault (IGBT) [30]: The output is 13-1*. If Comparator 5 is evaluated as
Logic ‘1’ when the brake IGBT is short- TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
circuited. Use this function to protect the
it will be low.
frequency converter if there is a fault on
the brake modules. Use the output/relay • Logic Rule 0 [70]: See par. group
to cut out the main voltage from the fre- 13-4*. If Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as
quency converter. TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
it will be low.
• Relay 123 [31]: The relay is activated
when Control Word [0] is selected in pa- • Logic Rule 1 [71]: See par. group
rameter group 8-**. 13-4*. If Logic Rule 1 is evaluated as
TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
• Mechanical brake control [32]: Ena- it will be low.
bles control of an external mechanical
brake, see description in the section Con- • Logic Rule 2 [72]: See par. group
trol of Mechanical Brake, and par. group 13-4*. If Logic Rule 2 is evaluated as
2-2* TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
it will be low.
• Safe stop activated [33]: Indicates
that the safe stop on terminal 37 has been • Logic Rule 3 [73]: See par. group
activated. 13-4*. If Logic Rule 3 is evaluated as
TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
• Out of ref range [40] it will be low.
• Below reference low [41]
• Logic Rule 4 [74]: See par. group
• Above reference high [42] 13-4*. If Logic Rule 4 is evaluated as
• Bus Ctrl [45] TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise,
it will be low.
• Bus Ctrl On at time-out [46]
• Bus Ctrl Off at time-out [47]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

78 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

• Logic Rule 5 [75]: See par. group ence Site = [0] Linked to hand auto at the
13-4*. If Logic Rule 5 is evaluated as same time as the LCP is in Hand on mode.
TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise, • Remote reference active [121]: The
it will be low. output is high when par. 3-13 Reference
• SL Digital Output A [80]: See par. Site = Remote [1] or Linked to hand/au-
13-52 SL Control Action. The input will go to [0] while the LCP is in [Auto on] mode.
high whenever the Smart Logic Action
• No alarm [122]: The output is high
[38] Set dig. out. A high is executed. The when no alarm is present.
input will go low whenever the Smart Log-
ic Action [32] Set dig. out. A low is exe- • Start command active [123]: The out-
cuted. put is high when there is an active Start
command (i.e. via digital input bus con-
• SL Digital Output B [81]: See par. nection or [Hand on] or [Auto on]), and no
13-52 SL Control Action. The input will go Stop or Start command is active.
high whenever the Smart Logic Action
[39] Set dig. out. A high is executed. The • Running reverse [124]: The output is
input will go low whenever the Smart Log- high when the drive is running counter
ic Action [33] Set dig. out. A low is exe- clockwise (the logical product of the sta-
cuted. tus bits ‘running’ AND ‘reverse’).

• SL Digital Output C [82]: See par. • Drive in hand mode [125]: The output
13-52SL Control Action. The input will go is high when the drive is in Hand on mode
high whenever the Smart Logic Action (as indicated by the LED light above
[40] Set dig. out. A high is executed. The [Hand on]).
input will go low whenever the Smart Log- • Drive in auto mode [126]: The output
ic Action [34] Set dig. out. A low is exe- is high when the drive is in Hand on mode
cuted. (as indicated by the LED light above [Auto
• SL Digital Output D [83]: See par. on]).
13-52 SL Control Action. The input will go
high whenever the Smart Logic Action
[41] Set dig. out. A high is executed. The
input will go low whenever the Smart Log-
ic Action [35] Set dig. out. A low is exe-
cuted.
• SL Digital Output E [84]: See par.
13-52 SL Control Action. The input will go
high whenever the Smart Logic Action
[42] Set dig. out. A high is executed. The
input will go low whenever the Smart Log-
ic Action [36] Set dig. out. A low is exe-
cuted.
• SL Digital Output F [85]: See par.
13-52 SL Control Action. The input will go
high whenever the Smart Logic Action
[43] Set dig. out. A high is executed. The
input will go low whenever the Smart Log-
ic Action [37] Set dig. out. A low is exe-
cuted.
• Local reference active [120]: The out-
put is high when par. 3-13 Reference
Site = [2] Local or when par. 3-13Refer-

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 79

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function:
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output
This parameter is active when option module MCB
Value: 101 is mounted in the frequency converter.
Bus ctrl. [45] Follow the function stated in 5-3*.
Bus ctrl. on at timeout [46]
Bus ctrl. off at timeout [47]
Terminal X30/7 Digital Output
5-33
Function: (MCB 101)
Select Bus ctrl. [45] to control the output via bus. Value:
The state of the output is set in par. 5-90. The No operation [0]
output state is retained in the event of bus time-
out. Function:
Select Bus ctrl. On at time-out [46] to control the This parameter is active when option module MCB
output via bus. The state of the output is set in 101 is mounted in the frequency converter.
par. 5-90. In the event of bus time-out the output Follow the function stated in 5-3*.
state is set high (On).
Select Bus ctrl. Off at time-out [47] to control the
5-4* Relays
output via bus. The state of the output is set in
Parameters for configuring the timing and the out-
par. 5-90. In the event of bus time-out the output
put functions for the relays.
state is set low (Off).

5-40 Function Relay

5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output Value:

Value: (Relay 1) [1]

Bus ctrl. [45] (Relay 2) [2]

Bus ctrl. on at timeout [46] Relay 7 [7]

Bus ctrl. off at timeout [47] Relay 8 [8]

Relay 9 [9]
Function: Control word bit 11 [36]
Select Bus ctrl. [45] to control the output via bus.
Control word bit 12 [37]
The state of the output is set in par. 5-90. The
Relay 2 is included in FC 302 only. Par.
output state is retained in the event of bus time-
5-40 functions are as for par. 5-3*, in-
out.
cluding options 36 and 37.
Select Bus ctrl. On at time-out [46] to control the
output via bus. The state of the output is set in
Function:
par. 5-90. In the event of bus time-out the output
Par. 5-40 options are as for par. 5-30, including
state is set high (On).
options 36 and 37. Relay 2 is included in FC 302
Select Bus ctrl. Off at time-out [47] to control the
only. Relay 7, 8 and 9 are included in MCB 105
output via bus. The state of the output is set in
Relay option module.
par. 5-90. In the event of bus time-out the output
state is set low (Off).
This parameter only applies for FC 302.
5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [8] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay

Terminal X30/6 Digital Output 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
5-32
(MCB 101)
Value:
Value:
0.01 - 600.00 s 0.01s
No operation [0]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

80 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function:
Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time. Select one
of available mechanical relays and MCO 105 in an
array function. See par. 5-40.

5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

Value:
0 - 110000 Hz 100Hz
Function:
Enter the low frequency limit corresponding to the
low motor shaft speed (i.e. low reference value)
in par. 5-52. Refer to the diagram in this section.
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

5-42 Off Delay, Relay

Array [8] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency
7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
Value:

Value: 0 - 110000 Hz 100Hz

0.01 - 600.00 s. 0.01s Function:
Enter the high frequency limit corresponding to
Function:
the high motor shaft speed (i.e. high reference
Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time. Select
value) in par. 5-53.
one of available mechanical relays and MCO 105
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
in an array function. See par. 5-40.

5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Value:
-1000000.000 - par. 5-53 0.000
Function:
Enter the low reference value limit for the motor
shaft speed [RPM]. This is also the lowest feed-
back value, see also par. 5-57. Set terminal 29 to
If the Selected Event condition changes before the digital output (par. 5-02 =Output [1] and par.
on- or off delay timer expires, the relay output is 5-13 = applicable value).
unaffected. This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

5-5* Pulse Input

5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
The pulse input parameters are used to define an
appropriate window for the impulse reference Value:
area by configuring the scaling and filter settings Par. 5-52 - 1000000.000 1500.000
for the pulse inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act Function:
as frequency reference inputs. Set terminal 29 Enter the high reference value [RPM] for the mo-
(par. 5-13) or terminal 33 (par. 5-15) to Pulse in- tor shaft speed and the high feedback value, see
put [32]. If terminal 29 is used as an input, then
set par. 5-01 to Input [0].

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 81

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

also par.5-58. Select terminal 29 as a digital out-

put (par. 5-02 =Output [1] and par. 5-13 = ap- 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
plicable value). Value:
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Par. 5-57 - 100000.000 1500.000
Function:
Enter the high reference value [RPM] for the mo-
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 tor shaft speed. See also par. 5-53 Term. 29 High
Value: Ref./Feedb. Value.
1 - 1000 ms 100ms
Function:
Enter the pulse filter time constant. The pulse fil- 5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33
ter dampens oscillations of the feedback signal, Value:
which is an advantage if there is a lot of noise in 1 - 1000 ms 100ms
the system. A high time constant value results in Function:
better dampening but also increases the time de- Enter the pulse filter time constant. The low-pass
lay through the filter. This parameter is available filter reduces the influence on and dampens oscil-
for FC 302 only. lations on the feedback signal from the control.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- This is an advantage, e.g. if there is a great
tor is running. amount on noise in the system. This parameter
cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency

5-6* Pulse Outputs
Value:
Parameters for configuring the scaling and output
0 - 110000 Hz 100Hz functions of pulse outputs. The pulse outputs are
Function: designated to terminals 27 or 29. Select terminal
Enter the low frequency corresponding to the low 27 output in par. 5-01 and terminal 29 output in
motor shaft speed (i.e. low reference value) in par. 5-02.
par. 5-57. Refer to the diagram in this section.

5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency

Value:
0 - 110000 Hz 100Hz
Function:
Enter the high frequency corresponding to the
high motor shaft speed (i.e. high reference value)
in par. 5-58.

5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Options for readout output variables:
Value:
-100000.000 – par. 5-58 0.000
Function:
Enter the low reference value [RPM] for the motor
shaft speed. This is also the low feedback value,
see also par. 5-52.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

82 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

*No operation [0] Function:

Bus control [45]
Select the variable for viewing on the terminal 29
Bus control time-out [48]
MCO controlled [51] display. This parameter is available for FC 302 on-
Output frequency [100] ly.
Reference [101] This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
Feedback [102] tor is running.
Motor current [103]
Torque relative to limit [104]
Torque relative to rated [105]
Power [106] Pulse Output Maximum Frequency
5-65
Speed [107] #29
Torque [108]
Value:
Max Out Freq [109]
0 - 32000 Hz 5000Hz
Function: Function:
Parameters for configuring the scaling and output Set the maximum frequency for terminal 29 cor-
functions of pulse outputs. The pulse outputs are responding to the output variable set in par. 5-63.
designated to terminals 27 or 29. Select terminal This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
27 output in par. 5-01 and terminal 29 output in tor is running.
par. 5-02.

Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Vari-

5-66
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable able
Value: Value:
No operation [0] No operation [0]

Function: Function:
Select the variable for viewing on the terminal 27 Select the variable for read-out on terminal
display. X30/6. This parameter cannot be adjusted while
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- the motor is running.
tor is running. This parameter is active when option module MCB
101 is installed in the frequency converter.

Pulse Output Maximum Frequency

5-62
#27 Pulse Output Maximum Frequency
5-68
Value: #X30/6
0 - 32000 Hz 5000Hz Value:
Function: 0 - 32000 Hz 5000Hz
Set the maximum frequency for terminal 27, cor- Function:
responding to the output variable selected in par. Select the maximum frequency on terminal X30/6
5-60. referring to the output variable in par. 5-66. This
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is
tor is running. running.
This parameter is active when option module MCB
101 is mounted in the frequency converter.
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
Value: 5-7* 24 V Encoder Input
No operation [0] Parameters for configuring the 24 V encoder.
Connect the 24 V encoder to terminal 12 (24 V DC
supply), terminal 32 (Channel A), terminal 33
(Channel B), and terminal 20 (GND). The digital
inputs 32/33 are active for encoder inputs when

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 83

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

24 V encoder is selected in par. 1-02 and par. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
7-00. The encoder used is a dual channel (A and tor is running.
B) 24 V type. Max input frequency: 110 kHz.
5-9* Bus Controlled
This parameter group selects digital and relay out-
puts via a fieldbus setting.

5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

Value:
0 - FFFFFFFF 0
Function:
This parameter holds the state of the digital out-
puts and relays that is controlled by bus.
A logical '1' indicates that the output is high or
active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is low or in-
active.

Bit 0 Digital Output Terminal 27

Bit 1 Digital Output Terminal 29
Bit 2 Digital Output Terminal X 30/6
Bit 3 Digital Output Terminal X 30/7
Bit 4 Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 5 Relay 2 output terminal
Bit 6 Option B Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 7 Option B Relay 2 output terminal
Bit 8 Option B Relay 3 output terminal
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses per Revolution Bit 9-15 Reserved for future terminals
Bit 16 Option C Relay 1 output terminal
Value:
Bit 17 Option C Relay 2 output terminal
128 - 4096 PPR 1024PPR Bit 18 Option C Relay 3 output terminal
Bit 19 Option C Relay 4 output terminal
Function: Bit 20 Option C Relay 5 output terminal
Set the encoder pulses per revolution on the mo- Bit 21 Option C Relay 6 output terminal
tor shaft. Read the correct value from the encod- Bit 22 Option C Relay 7 output terminal
Bit 23 Option C Relay 8 output terminal
er.
Bit 24-31 Reserved for future terminals
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.
5-93 Pulse Output #27 Bus Control
Value:
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction
0.00 - 100.00% 0%
Value:
Function:
*Clockwise [0]
Set the output frequency transferred to the output
Counter clockwise [1] terminal 27 when the terminal is configured as
'Bus Controlled' in par. 5-60 [45].
Function:
Change the detected encoder rotation direction
without changing the wiring to the encoder. Select
Clockwise [0] to set channel A 90° (electrical de-
grees) behind channel B upon clockwise rotation
of the encoder shaft. Select Counter clockwise [1]
to set channel A 90° (electrical degrees) ahead of
channel B upon clockwise rotation of the encoder
shaft.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

84 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

5-94 Pulse Output #27 Time-out Preset

Value:
0.00 - 100.00% 0.00%
Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the output
terminal 27 when the terminal is configured as
'Bus Ctrl Timeout' in par. 5-60 [48]. And a time-
out is detected.

5-95 Pulse Output #29 Bus Control

Value:
0.00 - 100.00% 0%
Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the output
terminal 29 when the terminal is configured as
'Bus Controlled' in par. 5-60 [45].
This parameter only applies for FC 302.

5-96 Pulse Output #29 Time-out Preset

Value:
0.00 - 100.00% 0.00%
Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the output
terminal 29 when the terminal is configured as
'Bus Ctrl Timeout' in par. 5-60 [48]. And a time-
out is detected.
This parameter only applies for FC 302.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 85

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Analog In/Out 2. Par. 5-74 Encoder Loss Function

3. Par. 8-04 Control-word Time-out Function
6-** Analog In/Out The output frequency of the frequency
Parameter group for configuration of the analog converter can be:
input and output. The output frequency of the frequency converter
6-0* Analog I/O Mode can be:
The analog inputs can freely be allocated to be ei- • [1] frozen at the present value
ther voltage (FC 301: 0..10 V, FC 302: 0..+/- • [2] overruled to stop
10V) or current (FC 301/302: 0/4..20 mA) input.
• [3] overruled to jog speed
NB!
• [4] overruled to max. speed
Thermistors may be connected to ei-
ther an analog or a digital input. • [5] overruled to stop with subsequent trip

6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 6-1* Analog Input 1

Value: Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits

for analog input 1 (terminal 53).
1 - 99 s 10s
Function:
Enter the Live Zero Time-out time period. Live
Zero Time-out Time is active for analog inputs, i.e.
terminal 53 or terminal 54, allocated to current
and used as reference or feedback sources. If the
reference signal value associated with the selec-
ted current input falls below 50% of the value set
in par. 6-10, par. 6-12, par. 6-20 or par. 6-22 for
a time period longer than the time set in par.
6-00, the function selected in par. 6-01 will be ac-
tivated.

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Value: 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Off [0] Value:
Freeze Output [1] FC 301: 0V - par. 6-11 0.07V
Stop [2] FC 302: -10V - par. 6-11
Jogging [3] Function:
Max. speed [4] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input
scaling value should correspond to the minimum
Stop and trip [5]
reference value, set in par. 6-14. See also the
Function: section Reference Handling.
Select the time-out function. The function set in
par. 6-01 will be activated if the input signal on
terminal 53 or 54 is below 50% of the value in par. 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
6-10, par. 6-12, par. 6-20 or par. 6-22 for a time Value:
period defined in par. 6-00. If several time-outs Par. 6-10 to 10.0 V 10.0V
occur simultaneously, the frequency converter Function:
prioritises the time-out functions as follows: Enter the high voltage value. This analog input
1. Par. 6-01 Live Zero Time-out Function scaling value should correspond to the high refer-
ence/feedback value set in par. 6-15.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

86 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 6-2* Analog Input 2

Value: Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits
0.0 to par. 6-13 mA 0.14mA for analog input 2 (terminal 54).
Function:
Enter the low current value. This reference signal 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
should correspond to the minimum reference val- Value:
ue, set in par. 3-02. The value must be set at >2 FC 301: 0V - par. 6-11 0.07V
mA in order to activate the Live Zero Time-out FC 302: -10V - par. 6-11
Function in par. 6-01. Function:
Enter the low voltage value. This analog input
scaling value should correspond to the minimum
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current reference value, set in par. 3-02. See also the
Value: section Reference Handling.
Par. 6-12 to - 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
Function:
Enter the high current value corresponding to the 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
high reference/feedback set in par. 6-15. Value:
Par. 6-20 to 10.0 V 10.0V
Function:
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Enter the high voltage value. This analog input
Value: scaling value should correspond to the high refer-
-1000000.000 to par. 6-15 0.000 Unit ence/feedback value set in par. 6-25.
Function:
Enter the analog input scaling value that corre-
sponds to the low voltage/low current set in par. 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
6-10 and 6-12. Value:
0.0 to par. 6-23 mA 0.14mA
Function:
Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Val- Enter the low current value. This reference signal
6-15
ue should correspond to the minimum reference val-
Value: ue, set in par. 3-02. The value must be set at >2
Par. 6-14 to 1000000.000 1500.000 Unit mA in order to activate the Live Zero Time-out
Function: Function in par. 6-01.
Enter the analog input scaling value that corre-
sponds to the maximum reference feedback value
set in par. 6-11 and 6-13. 6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
Value:
Par. 6-22 to - 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant Function:
Value: Enter the high current value corresponding to the
0.001 - 10.000 s 0.001s high reference/feedback value set in par. 6-25.
Function:
Enter the time constant. This is a first-order digital
low pass filter time constant for suppressing elec- 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
trical noise in terminal 53. A high time constant Value:
value improves dampening but also increases the -1000000.000 to par. 6-25 0.000 Unit
time delay through the filter.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 87

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb.

6-34
Enter the analog input scaling value that corre- Value
sponds to the minimum reference feedback value Value:
set in par. 3-02. 1000000.000 to par. 6-35 0.000 Unit
Function:
Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond
6-25 Terminal 54 high ref./feedb. value to the low voltage value (set in par. 6-30).
Value:
Par. 6-24 to 1000000.000 1500.000 Unit
Function: Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb.
6-35
Enter the analog input scaling value that corre- Value
sponds to the maximum reference feedback value Value:
set in par. 3-03. Par. 6-34 to 1000000.000 1500.000 Unit
Function:
Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant to the high voltage value (set in par. 6-31).
Value:
0.001 - 10.000 s 0.001s
Function: 6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
Enter the time constant. This is a first-order digital Value:
low pass filter time constant for suppressing elec- 0.001 - 10.000 s 0.001s
trical noise in terminal 54. A high time constant Function:
value improves dampening but also increases the A 1st order digital low pass filter time constant for
time delay through the filter.
suppressing electrical noise on terminal X30/11.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
Par. 6-36 cannot be changed while the motor is
tor is running. running.

6-3* Analog Input 3 (MCB 101) 6-4* Analog Input 4 (MCB 101)
Parameter group for configuring the scale and lim-
Parameter group for configuring the scale and lim-
its for analog input 3 (X30/11) placed on option
its for analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on option
module MCB 101. module MCB 101.

6-30 Term. X30/11 Low Voltage 6-40 Term. X30/12 Low Voltage
Value: Value:
0 - par. 6-31 0.07V 0 to par. 6-41 0.7V
Function: Function:
Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond
Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond
to the low reference/feedback value (set in par.
to the low reference/feedback value set in par.
6-34). 6-44.

6-31 Term. X30/11 High Voltage

6-41 Term. X30/12 High Voltage
Value:
Value:
Par. 6-30 to 10.0 V 10.0V Par. 6-40 to 10.0 V 10.0V
Function:
Function:
Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond
to the high reference/feedback value (set in par. to the high reference/feedback value set in par.
6-35).
6-45.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

88 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Torque [108]

6-44
Value Max Out Freq 0-20 mA [109]
Value: Output freq. 4-20 mA [130]
-1000000.000 to par. 6-45 0.000 Unit Reference 4-20 mA [131]
Function: Feedback 4-20 mA [132]
Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond
Motor cur. 4-20 mA [133]
to the low voltage value set in par. 6-44.
Torque % lim. 4-20 mA [134]
Torque % nom 4-20 mA [135]
Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Power 4-20 mA [136]
6-45
Value Speed 4-20 mA [137]
Value: Torque 4-20 mA [138]
Par. 6-44 to 1000000.000 1500.000 Unit Bus ctrl. 0-20 mA [139]
Function: Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA [140]
Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond Bus ctrl. 0-20 mA, timeout [141]
to the high voltage value set in par. 6-41.
Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA, timeout [142]
Max Out Freq 4-20 mA [150]

6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant

Function:
Value: Select the function of Terminal 42 as an analog
0.001 - 10.000 s 0.001s current output.
Function:
A 1st order digital low pass filter time constant for
suppressing electrical noise on terminal X30/12. 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
Par. 6-46 cannot be changed while the motor is Value:
running. 0.00 – 200% 0%
Function:
6-5* Analog Output 1 Scale the minimum output of the selected analog
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits signal at terminal 42, as a percentage of the max-
for analog output 1, i.e. Terminal 42. Analog out- imum signal value. E.g. if 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired
puts are current outputs: 0/4 – 20 mA. Common at 25% of the maximum output value, then pro-
terminal (terminal 39) is the same terminal and gramme 25%. Scaling values up to 100% can
has the same electrical potential for analog com- never be higher than the corresponding setting in
mon and digital common connection. Resolution par. 6-52.
on analog output is 12 bit.

6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Value:
No operation [0]
MCO 305 0-20 mA [52]
MCO 305 4-20 mA [53]
Output frequency [100]
Reference [101]
Feedback [102]
Motor current [103] 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
Torque rel to lim [104] Value:
Torque rel to rated [105] 000 – 200% 100%
Power [106]
Speed [107]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 89

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

Scale the maximum output of the selected analog Value:
signal at terminal 42. Set the value to the maxi- No operation [0]
mum value of the current signal output. Scale the Output frequency (0 . 1000 Hz), 0.20
output to give a current lower than 20 mA at full mA [100]
scale; or 20 mA at an output below 100% of the
Output frequency (0 . 1000 Hz), 4.20
maximum signal value. If 20 mA is the desired
mA
output current at a value between 0 - 100% of the
Reference (Refmin-max),0.20 mA [101]
full-scale output, programme the percentage val-
Reference (Ref min-max), 4.20 mA
ue in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a cur-
Feedback (FB min-max)0.20 mA [102]
rent between 4 and 20 mA is desired at maximum
output (100%), calculate the percentage value as Feedback (FB min-max) 4.20 mA
follows: Motor current (0-Imax) 0.20 mA [103]
Motor current (0-Imax) 4.20 mA
20 m A / desired maximum current x 100 %
Torque relative to limit0-Tlim,0.20 mA [104]
20
i .e. 10 m A : x 100 = 200 % Torque relative to limit 0-Tlim, 4.20 mA
10
Torque relativetorated0-Tnom,0.20
mA [105]
Torque relative to rated 0-Tnom, 4.20
mA
Power (0-Pnom),0.20 mA [106]
Power (0-Pnom), 4.20 mA
Speed (0-Speedmax), 0.20 mA [107]
Speed (0-Speedmax), 4.20 mA
Torque (+/-160% torque), 0-20 mA [108]
Torque (+/-160% torque), 4-20 mA
Output freq. 4-20 mA [130]
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control Reference 4-20 mA [131]
Value: Feedback 4-20 mA [132]
0.00 – 100.00 % 0.00% Motor cur. 4-20 mA [133]
Function: Torque % lim. 4-20 mA [134]
Holds the level of Output 42 if controlled by bus. Torque % nom 4-20 mA [135]
Power 4-20 mA [136]
Speed 4-20 mA [137]
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
Torque 4-20 mA [138]
Value:
Bus Ctrl 0-20 mA [139]
0.00 – 100.00 % 0.00%
Bus Ctrl 4-20 mA [140]
Function:
Bus Ctrl 0-20 mA, Timeout [141]
Holds the preset level of Output 42.
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout function is Bus Ctrl 4-20 mA, Timeout [142]
selected in par. 6-50 the output will preset to this Max Out Freq 4-20 mA [150]
level.

6-61 Term. X30/8 Output Min Scale

6-6* Analog Output 2 (MCB 101) Value:
Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/4 - 20 mA. 0.00 - 200 % 0%
Common terminal (terminal X30/7) is the same
Function:
terminal and electrical potential for analog com-
Scales the minimum output of the selected analog
mon connection. Resolution on analog output is
signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the minimum val-
12 bit.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

90 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

ue as a percentage of the maximum signal value,

i.e. 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% of the max-
imum output value and 25% is programmed. The
value can never be higher than the corresponding
setting in par. 6-62 if value is below 100%.
This parameter is active when option module MCB
101 is mounted in the frequency converter.

6-62 Term. X30/8 Output Max Scale

Value:
0.00 - 200 % 100%
Function:
Scales the maximum output of the selected ana-
log signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value to
the desired maximum value of the current signal
output. Scale the output to give a lower current
than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an output
below 100% of the maximum signal value. If 20
mA is the desired output current at a value be-
tween 0 - 100% of the ful-scale output, program
the percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50%
= 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA is de-
sired at maximum output (100%), calculate the
percentage value as follows:
20 m A / desired maximum current x 100 %
20
i .e. 10 m A : x 100 = 200 %
10

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 91

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Controllers 7-03

Speed Integral Time
7-** Controllers PID

Parameter group for configuring application con- Value:

trols. 2.0 - 20000.0 ms 8.0ms

7-0* Speed PID Ctrl. Function:

Enter the speed controller integral time, which de-
Parameters for configuring the speed PID control.
termines the time the internal PID control takes to
correct errors. The greater the error, the more
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source
quickly the gain increases. The integral time cau-
Value:
ses a delay of the signal and therefore a dampen-
Motor feedb. p.1-02 (FC 302 only) [0] ing effect, and can be used to eliminate steady
24V encoder [1] state speed error. Obtain quick control through a
MCB 102 [2] short integral time, though if the integral time is
MCB 103 [3] too short, the process becomes unstable. An ex-
cessively long integral time disables the integral
MCO encoder 1 [4]
action, leading to major deviations from the re-
MCO encoder 2 [5]
quired reference, since the process regulator
takes too long to regulate errors. This parameter
Function:
is used with Speed open loop [0] and Speed
Select the encoder for closed loop feedback.
closed loop [1] control, set in par. 1-00 Configu-
The feedback may come from a different encoder
ration Mode.
(typically mounted on the application itself) than
the motor mounted encoder feedback selected in
par. 1-02.
7-04
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
Speed Differentiation Time
tor is running.
PID
NB! Value:
If separate encoders are used (FC 302
0.0 - 200.0 ms 30.0ms
only) the ramp settings parameters in
Function:
the following groups: 3-4*, 3-5*,
Enter the speed controller differentiation time.
3-6*, 3-7* and 3-8* must be adjusted
The differentiator does not react to constant error.
according to the gear ratio between
It provides gain proportional to the rate of change
the two encoders.
of the speed feedback. The quicker the error
changes, the stronger the gain from the differen-
tiator. The gain is proportional with the speed at
7-02
which errors change. Setting this parameter to
Speed ProportionalGain
zero disables the differentiator. This parameter is
PID
used with par. 1-00 Speed closed loop [1] control.
Value:
0.000 - 1.000 [Size related]
7-05
Function:
Speed Diff Gain Limit
Enter the speed controller proportional gain. The
PID
proportional gain amplifies the error (i.e. the de-
Value:
viation between the feedback signal and the set-
point). This parameter is used with par. 1-00 1.0 - 20.0 5.000
Speed open loop [0] and Speed closed loop [1] Function:
control. Quick control is obtained at high amplifi- Set a limit for the gain provided by the differen-
cation. However if the amplification is too great, tiator. Since the differential gain increases at
the process may become unstable.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

92 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

higher frequencies, limiting the gain may be use- Function:

ful. For example, set up a pure D-link at low fre- The reference signal bypasses the speed control-
quencies and a constant D-link at higher frequen- ler by the amount specified. This feature increases
cies. This parameter is used with par. 1-00 Speed the dynamic performance of the speed control
closed loop [1] control. loop.

7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb.

7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time
Select the feedback sources for the Process PID
Value:
Control, and how this feedback should be handled.
1.0 - 100.0 ms 10.0ms
Function: 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Source
Set a time constant for the speed control low-pass Value:
filter. The low-pass filter improves steady-state
No function [0]
performance and dampens oscillations on the
Analog input 53 [1]
feedback signal. This is an advantage if there is a
great amount on noise in the system, see illustra- Analog input 54 [2]
tion below. For example, if a time constant (τ) of Frequency input 29 (FC 302 only) [3]
100 ms is programmed, the cut-off frequency for Frequency input 33 [4]
the low-pass filter will be 1/0.1= 10 RAD/sec., Bus feedback 1 [5]
corresponding to (10/2 x p) = 1.6 Hz. The PID
Bus feedback 2 [6]
regulator only regulates a feedback signal that
Analog input X30/11 [7]
varies by a frequency of less than 1.6 Hz. If the
feedback signal varies by a higher frequency than Analog input X30/12 [8]
1.6 Hz, the PID regulator does not react.
Function:
Note that severe filtering can be detrimental to
The effective feedback signal is made up of the
dynamic performance.
sum of up to two different input signals.
This parameter is used with par. 1-00 Speed
Select which frequency converter input should be
closed loop [1] and Torque [2] control.
treated as the source of the first of these signals.
The second input signal is defined in par. 7-22.

7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Source

Value:
No function [0]
Analog input 53 [1]
Analog input 54 [2]
Frequency input 29 (FC 302 only) [3]
Frequency input 33 [4]
Bus feedback 1 [5]
Bus feedback 2 [6]
Analog input X30/11 [7]
Analog input X30/12 [8]

7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor Function:

Value: The effective feedback signal is made up of the
0 - 500% 0% sum of up to two different input signals. Select
which frequency converter input should be treated
as the source of the second of these signals. The
first input signal is defined in par. 7-21.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 93

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

7-3* Process PID Ctrl. Function:

Parameters for configuring the Process PID con- Enter the PID proportional gain. The proportional
trol. gain multiplies the error between the set point and
the feedback signal.
Process PID Normal/ Inverse Con-
7-30
trol
Value: 7-34 Process PID Integral Time
Normal [0] Value:
Inverse [1] 0.01 - 10000.00 10000.00s
Function:
Function: Enter the PID integral time. The integrator pro-
Select Normal [0] to set the process control to in- vides an increasing gain at a constant error be-
crease the output frequency. tween the set point and the feedback signal. The
Select Inverse [1] to set the process control to re- integral time is the time needed by the integrator
duce the output frequency. Normal and inverse to reach the same gain as the proportional gain.
control are implemented by introducing a differ-
ence between the reference signal and the feed-
back signal. 7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time
Value:
0.00 - 10.00 s 0.00s
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup
Function:
Value:
Enter the PID differentiation time. The differen-
Off [0] tiator does not react to a constant error, but pro-
On [1] vides a gain only when the error changes. The
shorter the PID differentiation time, the stronger
Function: the gain from the differentiator.
Select Off [0] to cease regulation of an error when
the output frequency can no longer be adjusted.
Select On [1] to continue regulation of an error 7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit
even when the output frequency cannot be in-
Value:
creased or decreased.
1.0 - 50.0 N/A 5.0N/A
Function:
7-32 Process PID Start Speed Enter a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). If
there is no limit, the DG will increase when there
Value:
are fast changes. Limit the DG to obtain a pure
0 - 6000 RPM 0RPM
differentiator gain at slow changes and a constant
Function: differentiator gain where fast changes occur.
Enter the motor speed to be attained as a start
signal for commencement of PID control. When
the power is switched on, the frequency converter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor
will commence ramping and then operate under
Value:
speed open loop control. Thereafter, when the
0 - 500% 0%
Process PID start speed is reached, the frequency
converter will change over to Process PID control. Function:
Enter the PID feed forward (FF) factor. The FF fac-
tor sends a constant fraction of the reference sig-
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain nal to bypass the PID control, so the PID control
only affects the remaining fraction of the control
Value:
signal. Any change to this parameter will thus af-
0.00 - 10.00 N/A 0.01N/A
fect the motor speed. When the FF factor is acti-

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

94 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

vated it provides less overshoot, and high dynam-

ics when changing the set point. Par. 7-38 is
active when par. 1-00 Configuration Mode is set
to [3] Process.

7-39 On Reference Bandwidth

Value:
0 - 200% 5%
Function:
Enter the On Reference bandwidth. When the PID
Control Error (the difference between the refer-
ence and the feedback) is less than the set value
of this parameter the On Reference status bit is
high, i.e. =1.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 95

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Communica- 8-02 will not change but the frequency converter
tions and Options will trip and display: Alarm 67 Option Changed.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
8-** Comm. and Options tor is running.

Parameter group for configuring communications

and options.
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time
8-0* General Settings
Value:
General settings for communications and options.
0.1 - 18000.0 s 1.0s
Function:
8-01 Control Site
Enter the maximum time expected to pass be-
Value:
tween the reception of two consecutive telegrams.
Digital and ctrl. word [0] If this time is exceeded, it indicates that the serial
Digital only [1] communication has stopped. The function selec-
Control word only [2] ted in par. 8-04 Control Word Time-out Function
will then be carried out. The time-out counter is
Function: triggered by a valid control word.
Select Digital and ctrl. word [0] for control using
both digital input and control word.
Select Digital only [1] for control using digital in- 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function
puts only. Value:
Select Control word only [2] for control using con-
Off [0]
trol word only.
Freeze Output [1]
The setting in this parameter overrides the set-
tings in par. 8-50 to 8-56. Stop [2]
Jogging [3]
Max. Speed [4]
8-02 Control Word Source Stop and trip [5]
Value: Select set-up 1 [7]
None [0] Select set-up 2 [8]
FC RS485 [1] Select set-up 3 [9]
FC USB [2] Select set-up 4 [10]
Option A [3]
Option B [4] Function:
Select the time-out function. The time-out func-
Option C0 [5]
tion activates when the control word fails to be
Option C1 [6]
updated within the time period specified in par.
External Can [30] 8-03 Control Word Time-out Time.

Function: - Off [0]: Resume control via serial bus

Select the source of the control word: one of two (Fieldbus or standard) using the most re-
serial interfaces or four installed options. During cent control word.
initial power-up, the frequency converter auto- - Freeze output [1]: Freeze output frequen-
matically sets this parameter to Option A [3] if it cy until communication resumes.
detects a valid fieldbus option installed in slot A.
- Stop [2]: Stop with auto restart when
If the option is removed, the frequency converter
communication resumes.
detects a change in the configuration, sets par.
8-02 back to default setting FC RS485, and the - Jogging [3]: Run the motor at JOG fre-
frequency converter then trips. If an option is in- quency until communication resumes.
stalled after initial power-up, the setting of par.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

96 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

- Max. freq. [4]: Run the motor at maxi- [1], the frequency converter performs the reset
mum frequency until communication re- and then immediately reverts to the Do not reset
sumes. [0] setting.
- Stop and trip [5]: Stop the motor, then Select Do not reset [0] to retain the set-up speci-
fied in par. 8-04, Select setup 1-4 following a
reset the frequency converter in order to
restart: via the fieldbus, via the reset but- control word time-out.
ton on the LCP or via a digital input. This parameter is active only when Hold set-up [0]
has been selected in par. 8-05 End-of-Time-out
- Select set-up 1-4 [7] - [10]: This option Function.
changes the set-up upon reestablishment
of communication following a control word
time-out. If communication resumes 8-07 Diagnosis Trigger
causing the time-out situation to disap-
Value:
pear, par. 8-05 End-of-time-out Function
Disable [0]
defines whether to resume the set-up
used before the time-out or to retain the Trigger on alarms [1]
set-up endorsed by the time-out function. Trigger alarms/warn. [2]
Note the following configuration required
in order to change the set-up after a time- Function:
out: Set Par. 0-10 Active set-up to Multi This parameter enables and controls the frequen-
set-up [9], and select the relevant link in cy converter diagnosis function and permits ex-
par. 0-12 This Set-up Linked To. pansion of the diagnosis data to 24 byte.

NB!
It relates only to Profibus.
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function
Value:
Hold set-up [0] - Disable [0]: Do not send extended diag-
Resume set-up [1] nosis data even if they appear in the fre-
quency converter.
Function: - Trigger on alarms [1]: Send extended di-
Select the action after receiving a valid control agnosis data when one or more alarms
word following a time-out. This parameter is ac- appear in alarm par. 16-90 or 9-53.
tive only when par. 8-04 is set to Set-up 1-4.
- Trigger alarms/warn. [2]: Send extended
Hold: The frequency converter retains the set-up
diagnosis data if one or more alarms or
selected in par. 8-04 and displays a warning, until
warnings appear in alarm par. 16-90,
par. 8-06 toggles. Then the frequency converter
9-53, or warning par. 16-92.
resumes its original set-up.
Resume: The frequency converter resumes the The content of the extended diagnosis frame is as
set-up active prior to the time-out. follows:

8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout

Value:
Do not reset [0]
Do reset [1]

Function:
Select Do reset [1] to return the frequency con-
verter to the original set-up following a control
word time-out. When the value is set to Do reset

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 97

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Byte Content Description Function:

0-5 Standard DP Di- Standard DP Diagnose Data This parameter enables configuration of bit 12 –
agnose Data
6 PDU length xx Header of extended diagnos- 15 in the status word.
tic data
7 Status type = Header of extended diagnos-
Profile Default [1]: The function on the bit cor-
0x81 tic data responds to the profile default selected in par.
8 Slot = 0 Header of extended diagnos-
tic data
8-10.
9 Status info = 0 Header of extended diagnos- Alarm 68 Only [2]: The bit is only set in case of
tic data
10 - 13 VLT par. 16-92 VLT warning word an Alarm 68.
14 - 17 VLT par. 16-03 VLT status word Trip except Alarm 68 [3]: The bit is set in case
18 - 21 VLT par. 16-90 VLT alarm word
22 - 23 VLT par. 9-53 Communication warning word of a trip, except if the trip is executed by an Alarm
(Profibus) 68.
T37 DI status [16]: The bit indicates the status
Enabling diagnosis may cause increased bus traf-
of terminal 37.
fic. Diagnosis functions are not supported by all
“0” indicates T37 is low (safe stop)
fieldbus types.
“1” indicates T37 is high (normal)

8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings

8-3* FC Port Settings
Parameters for configuring the option control
Parameters for configuring the FC Port.
word profile.

8-30 Protocol
8-10 Control Word Profile
Value:
Value:
FC [0]
FC profile [0]
FC MC [1]
PROFIdrive profile [1]
ODVA [5] Function:
CANopen DSP 402 [7] Select the protocol for the FC (standard) port.

Function:
Select the interpretation of the control and status 8-31 Address
words corresponding to the installed fieldbus. On-
Value:
ly the selections valid for the fieldbus installed in
1 - 126 1
slot A will be visible in the LCP display.
Function:
For guidelines in selection of FC profile [0] and
Enter the address for the FC (standard) port.
PROFIdrive profile [1] please refer to the Serial
Valid range: 1 - 126.
communication via RS 485 Interface section in the
How to Programmechapter.
For additional guidelines in the selection of PRO-
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
FIdrive profile [1], ODVA [5] and CANopen DSP
402 [7], please refer to the Operating Instructions Value:
for the installed fieldbus. 2400 Baud [0]
4800 Baud [1]
9600 Baud [2]
19200 Baud [3]
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW
38400 Baud [4]
Value:
115200 Baud [7]
No function [0]
Profile default [1] Function:
Alarm 68 only [2] Baud rate selection for the FC (standard) port.
Trip except Alarm 68 [3]
T37 DI status [[16]]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

98 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

8-35 Minimum Response Delay Logic OR [3]

Value:
1 - 500 ms 10ms Function:
Select control of the coasting function via the ter-
Function:
minals (digital input) and/or via the bus.
Specify the minimum delay time between receiv-
ing a request and transmitting a response. This is NB!
used for overcoming modem turnaround delays. This parameter is active only when
par. 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Dig-
ital and control word.
8-36 Max Response Delay
Value:
1 - 10000 ms 5000ms 8-51 Quick Stop Select

Function: Value:
Specify the maximum permissible delay time be- Digital input [0]
tween transmitting a request and receiving a re- Bus [1]
sponse. Exceeding this delay time will cause Logic AND [2]
control word time-out. Logic OR [3]

Function:
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay Select control of the Quick Stop function via the
Value: terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.
0 - 30 ms 25ms NB!
Function: This parameter is active only when
Specify the maximum permissible time interval par. 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Dig-
between receipt of two bytes. This parameter ac- ital and control word.
tivates time-out if transmission is interrupted.
This parameter is active only when par. 8-30 is set
to FC MC [1] protocol.
8-52 DC Brake Select
Value:
8-40 FC MC Protocol Set
Digital input [0]
Value:
Bus [1]
Standard Telegram 1 [1]
Logic AND [2]
Custom Telegram [200]
Logic OR [3]

Function:
Function:
Enables use of freely configurable telegrams or
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals
standard telegrams for the FC port.
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.

NB!
8-5* Digital/Bus
This parameter is active only when
Parameters for configuring the control word Digi-
par. 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Dig-
tal/Bus merging.
ital and control word.

8-50 Coasting Select

8-53 Start Select
Value:
Value:
Digital input [0]
Digital input [0]
Bus [1]
Bus [1]
Logic AND [2]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 99

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Logic AND [2] Bus [1]

Logic OR [3] Logic AND [2]
Logic OR [3]
Function:
Select control of the frequency converter start Function:
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or Select control of the frequency converter set-up
via the fieldbus. selection via the terminals (digital input) and/or
Select Bus [1], to activate the Start command via via the fieldbus.
the serial communication port or fieldbus option. Select Bus [1], to activate the set-up selection via
Select Logic AND [2] to activate the Start com- the serial communication port or fieldbus option.
mand via the fieldbus/serial communication port, Select Logic AND [2] to activate the set-up selec-
AND additionally via one of the digital inputs. tion via the fieldbus/serial communication port,
Select Logic OR [3] to activate the Start command AND additionally via one of the digital inputs.
via the fieldbus/serial communication port OR via Select Logic OR [3] to activate the set-up selec-
one of the digital inputs. tion via the fieldbus/serial communication port OR
NB! via one of the digital inputs.
This parameter is active only when NB!
par. 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Dig- This parameter is active only when
ital and control word. par. 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Dig-
ital and control word.

8-54 Reversing Select

Value: 8-56 Preset Reference Select
Digital input [0] Value:
Bus [1] Digital input [0]
Logic AND [2] Bus [1]
Logic OR [3] Logic AND [2]
Logic OR [3]
Function:
Select control of the frequency converter reverse Function:
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or Select control of the frequency converter Preset
via the fieldbus. Reference selection via the terminals (digital in-
Select Bus [1], to activate the Reverse command put) and/or via the fieldbus.
via the serial communication port or fieldbus op- Select Bus [1], to activate the Preset Reference
tion. selection via the serial communication port or
Select Logic AND [2] to activate the Reverse com- fieldbus option.
mand via the fieldbus/serial communication port, Select Logic AND [2] to activate the Preset Refer-
AND additionally via one of the digital inputs. ence selection via the fieldbus/serial communica-
Select Logic OR [3] to activate the Reverse com- tion port, AND additionally via one of the digital
mand via the fieldbus/serial communication port inputs.
OR via one of the digital inputs. Select Logic OR [3] to activate the Preset Refer-
NB! ence selection via the fieldbus/serial communica-
This parameter is active only when tion port OR via one of the digital inputs.
par. 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Dig- NB!
ital and control word. This parameter is active only when
par. 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Dig-
ital and control word.
8-55 Set-up Select
Value: 8-9* Bus Jog
Digital input [0] Parameters for configuring the Bus Jog.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

100 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

Value: 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
0 - par. 4-13 RPM 100RPM 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
Function: 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
Enter the jog speed. This is a fixed jog speed ac- 3-80 Jog Ramp Time
tivated via the serial port or fieldbus option.
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Value: 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
0 - par. 4-13 RPM 200RPM 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode

Function: 7-28 Minimum Feedback

Enter the jog speed. This is a fixed jog speed ac- 7-29 Maximum Feedback
tivated via the serial port or fieldbus option. 8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed
Parameters: Profibus 16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1
9-** Profibus 34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO
Parameter group for all Profibus-specific parame-
34-02 PCD 2 Write to MCO
ters.
34-03 PCD 3 Write to MCO
34-04 PCD 4 Write to MCO
9-00 Setpoint
34-05 PCD 5 Write to MCO
Value:
0-65535 34-06 PCD 6 Write to MCO
0
34-07 PCD 7 Write to MCO
Function:
This parameter receives cyclical reference from a 34-08 PCD 8 Write to MCO
Master Class 2. If the control priority is set to Mas- 34-09 PCD 9 Write to MCO
ter Class 2, the reference for the frequency con- 34-10 PCD 10 Write to MCO
verter is taken from this parameter, whereas the
cyclical reference will be ignored. Function:
Select the parameters to be assigned to PCD 3 to
10 of the telegrams. The number of available
9-07 Actual Value PCDs depends on the telegram type. The values in
Value: PCD 3 to 10 will then be written to the selected
0-65535 0 parameters as data values. Alternatively, specify
a standard Profibus telegram in par. 9-22.
Function:
This parameter deliveres the MAV for a Master
Class 2. The parameter is valid if the control pri-
9-16 PCD Read Configuration
ority is set to Master Class 2.
Array [10]

9-15 PCD Write Configuration Value:

Array [10] None
16-00 Control Word
Value:
16-01 Reference [Unit]
None
16-02 Reference %
3-02 Minimum Reference
16-03 Status Word
3-03 Maximum Reference
16-04 Main Actual Value [Unit]
3-12 Catch Up/Slow Down Value

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 101

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 34-23 PCD 3 Read from MCO
16-09 Custom Readout 34-24 PCD 4 Read from MCO
16-10 Power [kW] 34-25 PCD 5 Read from MCO
16-11 Power [hp] 34-26 PCD 6 Read from MCO
16-12 Motor Voltage 34-27 PCD 7 Read from MCO
16-13 Frequency 34-28 PCD 8 Read from MCO
16-14 Motor Current 34-29 PCD 9 Read from MCO
16-16 Torque 34-30 PCD 10 Read from MCO
16-17 Speed [RPM] 34-40 Digital Inputs
16-18 Motor Thermal 34-41 Digital Outputs
16-19 KTY Sensor Temperature 34-50 Actual Position
16-21 Phase Angle 34-51 Commanded Position
16-30 DC Link Voltage 34-52 Actual Master Position
16-32 Brake Energy / s 34-53 Slave Index Position
16-33 Brake Energy / 2 min 34-54 Master Index Position
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 34-55 Curve Position
16-35 Inverter Thermal 34-56 Track Error
16-38 SL Control State 34-57 Synchronizing Error
16-39 Control Card Temp. 34-58 Actual Velocity
16-50 External Reference 34-59 Actual Master Velocity
16-51 Pulse Reference 34-60 Synchronizin Status
16-52 Feedback [Unit] 34-61 Axis Status
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 34-62 Program Status
16-60 Digital Input
Function:
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
Select the parameters to be assigned to PCD 3 to
16-62 Analog Input 53
10 of the telegrams. The number of available
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting PCDs depends on the telegram type. PCDs 3 to 10
16-64 Analog Input 54 contain the actual data values of the selected pa-
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] rameters. For standard Profibus telegrams, see
16-66 Digital Output [bin] par. 9-22.
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
9-18 Node Address
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Value:
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
0 - 126 126
16-71 Pulse Output [bin]
Function:
16-84 Comm Option STW [Binary] Enter the station address in this parameter or al-
16-85 FC port CTW 1 Signal ternatively in the hardware switch. In order to
16-90 Alarm Word adjust the station address in par. 9-18, the hard-
16-91 Alarm Word 2 ware switch must be set to 126 or 127 (i.e. all
16-92 Warning Word switches set to ‘on’). Otherwise this parameter
will display the actual setting of the switch.
16-93 Warning Word 2
16-94 Extended Status Word
16-95 Extended Status Word 2
34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO
34-22 PCD 2 Read from MCO

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

102 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

ther terminals or fieldbus depending on the set-

9-22 Telegram Selection tings in par. 8-50 to 8-56.
Value: Select Disable [0] to disable process control via
Standard telegram 1 [1] Profibus, and enable process control via standard
PPO 1 [101] fieldbus or Profibus Master class 2.
PPO 2 [102] Select Enable cyclic master [1] to enable process
control via Profibus Master Class 1, and disable
PPO 3 [103]
process control via standard fieldbus or Profibus
PPO 4 [104]
Master class 2.
PPO 5 [105]
PPO 6 [106]
PPO 7 [107] 9-44 Fault Message Counter
PPO 8 [108] Value:
0-65535 0
Function:
Function:
Read only.
This parameter displays the number of error
Displays the Profibus telegram configuration. events stored in par. 9-45 and 9-47. The maxi-
mum buffer capacity is eight error events. The
buffer and counter are set to 0 upon reset or pow-
9-23 Parameters for Signals er-up.

Array [1000]
Read only
9-45 Fault Code

Function: Value:
This parameter contains a list of signals available 0-0 0
for selection in par. 9-15 and 9-16. Function:
This buffer contains the alarm word for all alarms
and warnings that have occurred since last reset
9-27 Parameter Edit or power-up. The maximum buffer capacity is
Value: eight error events.
Disabled [0]
Enabled [1]
9-47 Fault Number
Function: Value:
Parameters can be edited via Profibus, the stand- 0-0 0
ard RS485 interface, or the LCP. Function:
Select Disabled [0] to disable editing via Profibus. This buffer contains the alarm number (e.g. 2 for
live zero error, 4 for mains phase loss) for all
alarms and warnings that have occurred since last
9-28 Process Control reset or power-up. The maximum buffer capacity
Value: is eight error events.
Disable [0]
Enable cyclic master [1]
9-52 Fault Situation Counter
Function: Value:
Process control (setting of Control Word, speed 0 - 1000 0
reference, and process data) is possible via either
Profibus or standard fieldbus but not both simul-
taneously. Local control is always possible via the
LCP. Control via process control is possible via ei-

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 103

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function:
9-64 Device Identification
This parameter displays the number of error
events which have occurred since last reset of Value:
power-up. 0-0 0
Function:
This parameter displays the device identification.
9-53 Profibus Warning Word Please refer to the Operating Instructions for Pro-
Value: fibus, MG33CXYY for further explanation.
Read only

Bit: Meaning:
9-65 Profile Number
0 Connection with DP-master is not
1 Not used Value:
2 FDL (Field-bus Data link Layer) is not ok
3 Clear data command received Read only
4 Actual value is not updated
5 Baudrate search
0-0 0
6 PROFIBUS ASIC is not transmitting
7 Initializing of PROFIBUS is not ok
Function:
8 Drive is tripped This parameter contains the profile identification.
9 Internal CAN error
10 Wrong configuration data from PLC
Byte 1 contains the profile number and byte 2 the
11 Wrong ID sent by PLC version number of the profile.
12 Internal error occured
13 Not configured NB!
14 Timeout active
15 Warning 34 active This parameter is not visible via LCP.
Function:
This parameter displays Profibus communication
warnings. Please refer to the Profibus Operating
Instructions for further information. 9-67 Control Word 1
Value:
0-65535 0
9-63 Actual Baud Rate
Function:
Value: This parameter accepts the Control Word from a
Read only Master Class 2 in the same format as PCD 1.
9.6 kbit/s [0]
19.2 kbit/s [1]
9-68 Status Word 1
93.75 kbit/s [2]
Value:
187.5 kbit/s [3]
0-65535 0
500 kbit/s [4]
Function:
1500 kbit/s [6]
This parameter delivers the Status Word for a
3000 kbit/s [7]
Master Class 2 in the same format as PCD 2.
6000 kbit/s [8]
12000 kbit/s [9]
31.25 kbit/s [10] 9-70 Edit Set-up
45.45 kbit/s [11] Value:
No baud rate found [255] Factory setup [0]
Setup 1 [1]
Function:
Setup 2 [2]
This parameter displays the actual Profibus baud
Setup 3 [3]
rate. The Profibus Master automatically sets the
baud rate. Setup 4 [4]
Active setup [9]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

104 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: When reset, the frequency converter disappears

Select the set-up to be edited. from the fieldbus, which may cause a communi-
Select Set-up 1-4 [1]-[4] to edit a specific set-up. cation error from the master.
Select Active set-up [9] to follow the active set-up
selected in par. 0-10.
Select Factory set-up [0] for default data. This 9-80 Defined Parameters (1)
option can be used as a data source to return the
Array [116]
other set-ups to a known state.
This parameter is unique to LCP and fieldbuses.
Value:
See also par. 0-11 Edit set-up.
No LCP access
Read only
0 - 115 0
9-71 Save Data Values
Value: Function:
This parameter displays a list of all the defined
Off [0]
frequency converter parameters available for Pro-
Store edit setup [1]
fibus.
Store all set-ups [2]

Function:
9-81 Defined Parameters (2)
Parameter values changed via Profibus are not
automatically stored in non-volatile memory. Use Array [116]
this parameter to activate a function that stores
parameter values in the EEPROM non-volatile Value:
memory, so changed parameter values will be re- No LCP access
tained at power-down. Read only
Select Off [0] to deactivate the non-volatile stor- 0 - 115 0
age function.
Function:
Select Store edit setup [1] to store all parameter
This parameter displays a list of all the defined
values in the set-up selected in par. 9-70 in the
frequency converter parameters available for Pro-
non-volatile memory. The selection returns to Off
fibus.
[0] when all values have been stored.
Select Store all set-ups [2] to store all parameter
values for all set-ups in the non-volatile memory.
9-82 Defined Parameters (3)
The selection returns to Off [0] when all parame-
ter values have been stored. Array [116]

Value:
9-72 Drive Reset No LCP access
Value: Read only
No action [0] 0 - 115 0
Power-on reset [1] Function:
Comm. option reset [3] This parameter displays a list of all the defined
frequency converter parameters available for Pro-
Function: fibus.
Select Power-on reset [1] to reset the frequency
converter upon power-up, as for power-cycle.
Select Comm. option reset [3] to reset the Profi- 9-83 Defined Parameters (4)
bus option only, useful after changing certain set-
Array [116]
tings in parameter group 9-**, e.g. par. 9-18.

Value:
No LCP access

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 105

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Read only No LCP access

0 - 115 0 Read only
Function: 0 - 115 0
This parameter displays a list of all the defined Function:
frequency converter parameters available for Pro- This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
fibus. converter parameters deviating from default set-
ting.

9-84 Defined Parameters (5)

Value: 9-94 Changed Parameters (5)
Array [116]
Array [116]
No LCP access
Read only Value:
0 - 115 0 No LCP access
Function: Read only
This parameter displays a list of all the defined 0 - 115 0
frequency converter parameters available for Pro-
Function:
fibus.
This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
converter parameters deviating from default set-
ting.
9-90 Changed Parameters (1)

Array [116]

Value:
No LCP access
Read only
0 - 115 0
Function:
This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
converter parameters deviating from default set-
ting.

9-91 Changed Parameters (2)

Array [116]

Value:
No LCP access
Read only
0 - 115 0
Function:
This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
converter parameters deviating from default set-
ting.

9-92 Changed Parameters (3)

Array [116]

Value:

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

106 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: DeviceNet CAN 10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter

Fieldbus Value:
0 - 255 0
10-** DeviceNet and CAN Fieldbus
Parameter group for DeviceNet CAN fieldbus pa- Function:
rameters. View the number of CAN control transmission er-
rors since the last power-up.
10-0* Common Settings
Parameter group for configuring common settings
for CAN fieldbus options. 10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter
Value:
10-00 CAN Protocol
0 - 255 0
Value:
Function:
CANopen [0]
View the number of CAN control receipt errors
DeviceNet [1] since the last power-up.

Function:
View the active CAN protocol.
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter
NB! Value:
The options depend on installed op- 0 - 255 0
tion.
Function:
View the number of Bus Off events since the last
power-up.
10-01 Baud Rate Select
Value: 10-1* DeviceNet
10 Kbps [16] Parameters specific to the DeviceNet fieldbus.
20 Kbps [17]
50 Kbps [18] 10-10 Process Data Type Selection
100 Kbps [19] Value:
125 Kbps [20] Instance 100/150 [0]
250 Kbps [21] Instance 101/151 [1]
500 Kbps [22] Instance 20/70 [2]
Instance 21/71 [3]
Function:
Select the fieldbus transmission speed. The selec- Function:
tion must correspond to the transmission speed of Select the Instance (telegram) for data transmis-
the master and the other fieldbus nodes. sion. The Instances available are dependent upon
the setting of par. 8-10 Control Word Profile.
When par. 8-10 is set to [0] FC profile, par. 10-10
10-02 MAC ID options [0] and [1] are available.
Value: When par. 8-10 is set to [5] ODVA, par. 10-10
0 - 127 63 options [2] and [3] are available.
Function: Instances 100/150 and 101/151 are Danfoss-spe-
Selection of station address. Every station con- cific. Instances 20/70 and 21/71 are ODVA-spe-
nected to the same network must have an unam- cific AC Drive profiles.
biguous address. For guidelines in telegram selection, please refer
to the DeviceNet Operating Instructions.
Note that a change to this parameter will be exe-
cuted immediately.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 107

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

10-11 Process Data Config Write 16-04 Main Actual Value [Unit]
Value: 16-05 Main Actual Value (%) (Fixed)
0 None 16-10 Power [kW]
3-02 Minimum reference 16-11 Power [hp]
3-03 Maximum reference 16-12 Motor Voltage
3-12 Catch up/slow down value 16-13 Frequency
3-41 Ramp 1 ramp up time 16-14 Motor Current
3-42 Ramp 1 ramp down time 16-16 Torque
3-51 Ramp 2 ramp up time 16-17 Speed [RPM]
3-52 Ramp 2 ramp down time 16-18 Motor Thermal
3-80 Jog ramp time 16-19 KTY Sensor Temperature
3-81 Quick stop ramp time 16-21 Phase Angle
4-11 Motor speed low limit (RPM) 16-30 DC Link Voltage
4-13 Motor speed high limit (RPM) 16-32 BrakeEnergy/s
4-16 Torque limit motor mode 16-33 BrakeEnergy/2 min
4-17 Torque limit generator mode 16-34 Heatsink Temp.
7-28 Minimum Feedback 16-35 Inverter Thermal
7-29 Maximum Feedback 16-38 SL Control State
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 16-39 Controlcard Temp.
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 16-50 External Reference
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 (Fixed) 16-51 Pulse Reference
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 (Fixed) 16-52 Feedback [Unit]
34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO 16-53 Digi Pot Reference
34-02 PCD 2 Write to MCO 16-60 Digital Input
34-03 PCD 3 Write to MCO 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
34-04 PCD 4 Write to MCO 16-62 Analog Input 53
34-05 PCD 5 Write to MCO 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting
34-06 PCD 6 Write to MCO 16-64 Analog Input 54
34-07 PCD 7 Write to MCO 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
34-08 PCD 8 Write to MCO 16-66 Digital Output [bin]
34-09 PCD 9 Write to MCO 16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
34-10 PCD 10 Write to MCO 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Function:
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
Select the process write data for I/O Assembly In-
stances 101/151. Elements [2] and [3] of this 16-71 Relay Output [bin]
array can be selected. Elements [0] and [1] of the 16-84 Comm Option STW
array are fixed. 16-85 FC Port CTW 1
16-90 Alarm Word
16-91 Alarm Word 2
10-12 Process Data Config Read
16-92 Warning Word
Value:
16-93 Warning Word 2
None
16-94 Extended Status Word
16-00 Control Word
16-95 Extended Status Word 2
16-01 Reference [Unit]
34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO
16-02 Reference %
34-22 PCD 2 Read from MCO
16-03 Status Word (Fixed)

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

108 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

34-23 PCD 3 Read from MCO Bit: Meaning:

0 Bus not active
34-24 PCD 4 Read from MCO 1 Explicit connection timeout
34-25 PCD 5 Read from MCO 2 I/O connection
3 Retry limit reached
34-26 PCD 6 Read from MCO 4 Actual is not updated
5 CAN bus off
34-27 PCD 7 Read from MCO 6 I/O send error
7 Initialization error
34-28 PCD 8 Read from MCO 8 No bus supply
9 Bus off
34-29 PCD 9 Read from MCO 10 Error passive
34-30 PCD 10 Read from MCO 11 Error warning
12 Duplicate MAC ID Error
34-40 Digital Inputs 13 RX queue overrun
14 TX queue overrun
34-41 Digital Outputs 15 CAN overrun

34-50 Actual Position

34-51 Commanded Position
34-52 Actual Master Position
34-53 Slave Index Position 10-14 Net Reference
34-54 Master Index Position Value:
34-55 Curve Position Read only from LCP.
34-56 Track Error Off [0]
34-57 Synchronizing Error On [1]
34-58 Actual Velocity
Function:
34-59 Actual Master Velocity
Select the reference source in Instance 21/71 and
34-60 Synchronizing Status 20/70.
34-61 Axis Status Select Off [0] to enable reference via analog/dig-
34-62 Program Status ital inputs.
Select On [1] to enable reference via the fieldbus.
Function:
Select the process read data for I/O Assembly In-
stances 101/151. Elements [2] and [3] of this
array can be selected. Elements [0] and [1] of the 10-15 Net Control
array are fixed. Value:
Read only from LCP.
Off [0]
10-13 Warning Parameter
On [1]
Value:
0 - FFFF 0 Function:
Function: Select the control source in Instance 21/71 and
View a DeviceNet-specific Warning word. One bit 20-70.
is assigned to every warning. Please refer to the Select Off [0] to enable control via analog/digital
DeviceNet Operating Instructions (MG.33.DX.YY) inputs.
for further information. Select On [1] to enable control via the fieldbus.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 109

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

10-2* COS Filters

10-30 Array Index
Parameters for configuring COS filter settings.
Value:
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 - 255 0
Value: Read only from LCP.
0 - FFFF 0000 Function:
View array parameters. This parameter is valid
Function:
only when a DeviceNet fieldbus is installed.
Enter the value for COS Filter 1 to set up the filter
mask for the Status Word. When operating in COS
(Change-Of-State), this function filters out bits in
the Status Word that should not be sent if they
10-31 Store Data Values
change.
Value:
Off [0]
10-21 COS Filter 2 Store edit setup [1]
Value: Store all setups [2]
0 - FFFF 0000
Function: Function:
Parameter values changed via DeviceNet are not
Enter the value for COS Filter 2, to set up the filter
automatically stored in non-volatile memory. Use
mask for the Main Actual Value. When operating
in COS (Change-Of-State), this function filters out this parameter to activate a function that stores
parameter values in the EEPROM non-volatile
bits in the Main Actual Value that should not be
memory, so changed parameter values will be re-
sent if they change.
tained at power-down.
Select Off [0] to deactivate the non-volatile stor-
10-22 COS Filter 3 age function.
Select Store edit setup [1] to store all parameter
Value:
values from the active set-up in the non-volatile
0 - FFFF 0000
memory. The selection returns to Off [0] when all
Function: values have been stored.
Enter the value for COS Filter 3, to set up the filter Select Store all set-ups [2] to store all parameter
mask for PCD 3. When operating in COS (Change- values for all set-ups in the non-volatile memory.
Of-State), this function filters out bits in PCD 3 The selection returns to Off [0] when all parame-
that should not be sent if they change. ter values have been stored.

10-23 COS Filter 4 10-32 Devicenet Revision

Value: Value:
0 - FFFF 0000 Major revision
Function: Minor revision
Enter the value for COS Filter 4 to set up the filter
mask for PCD 4. When operating in COS (Change- Function:
Of-State), this function filters out bits in PCD 4 View the DeviceNet revision number. This param-
that should not be sent if they change. eter is used for EDS file creation.

10-3* Parameter Access

Parameter group providing access to indexed pa-
rameters and defining programming set-up. 10-33 Store Always
Value:
Off [0]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

110 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

On [1]

Function:
Select [0] to deactivate non-volatile storage of
data.
Select [1] to store parameter data received via
DeviceNet in EEPROM non-volatile memory as de-
fault.

10-39 Devicenet F Parameters

Array [1000]

Value:
No LCP access
0-0 0
Function:
This parameter is used to configure the frequency
converter via Devicenet and build the EDS-file.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 111

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Smart Logic 13-0* SLC Settings

Control Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate and
reset the Smart Logic Control.
13-** Prog. Features
Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a se-
quence of user defined actions (see par. 13-52 13-00 SL Controller Mode
[x]) executed by the SLC when the associated Value:
user defined event (see par. 13-51 [x]) is evalu- Off [0]
ated as TRUE by the SLC. Events and actions are On [1]
each numbered and linked together in pairs
(states). This means that when event [0] is fulfil- Function:
led (attains the value TRUE), action [0] is execu- Select On [1] to enable the Smart Logic Control-
ted. After this, the conditions of event [1] will be ler.
evaluated and if evaluated TRUE, action [1] will be Select Off [0] to disable the Smart Logic Control-
executed and so on. Only one event will be eval- ler.
uated at any time. If an event is evaluated as
FALSE, nothing happens (in the SLC) during the
current scan interval and no other events will be 13-01 Start Event
evaluated. This means that when the SLC starts,
it evaluates event [0] (and only event [0]) each Value:
scan interval. Only when event [0] is evaluated False [0]
TRUE, will the SLC execute action [0] and start True [1]
evaluating event [1]. It is possible to programme Running [2]
from 1 to 20 events and actions.
In range [3]
When the last event / action has been executed,
On reference [4]
the sequence starts over again from event [0] /
action [0]. The illustration shows an example with Torque limit [5]
three event / actions: Current limit [6]
Out of current range [7]
Below I low [8]
Above I high [9]
Out of speed range [10]
Below speed low [11]
Above speed high [12]
Out of feedb. range [13]
Below feedb. low [14]
Above feedb. high [15]
Thermal warning [16]
Mains out of range [17]
Reversing [18]
Starting and stopping the SLC: Warning [19]
Starting and stopping the SLC can be done by Alarm (trip) [20]
selecting .On [1]. or .Off [0]. in par. 13-00. The Alarm (trip lock) [21]
SLC always starts in state 0 (where it evaluates
Comparator 0 [22]
event [0]). The SLC starts when the Start Event
Comparator 1 [23]
(defined in par. 13-01 Start Event) is evaluated as
TRUE (provided that On [1] is selected in par. Comparator 2 [24]
13-00). The SLC stops when the Stop Event (par. Comparator 3 [25]
13-02) is TRUE. Par. 13-03 resets all SLC param- Logic rule 0 [26]
eters and start programming from scratch.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

112 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Logic rule 1 [27] Below speed low [11] The output speed is lower
Logic rule 2 [28] than the setting in par. 4-52.
Above speed high [12] The output speed is higher
Logic rule 3 [29]
than the setting in par. 4-53.
Digital input DI18 [33]
Out of feedb. Range [13] The feedback is outside
Digital input DI19 [34] the range set in par. 4-56 and 4-57.
Digital input DI27 [35] Below feedb. Low [14] The feedback is below the
Digital input DI29 (FC 302 only) [36] limit set in par. 4-56.
Digital input DI32 [37] Above feedb. High [15] The feedback is above the
limit set in par. 4-57.
Digital input DI33 [38]
Thermal warning [16] The thermal warning turns
Start command [39]
on when the temperature exceeds the limit in the
Drive stopped [40] motor, the frequency converter, the brake resistor
Reset Trip [41] or the thermistor.
Auto-reset Trip [42] Mains out of range [17] The mains voltage is out-
Ok key [43] side the specified voltage range.
Reset key [44] Reversing [18] The output is high when the drive
is running counter clockwise (the logical product
Left key [45]
of the status bits “running” AND “reverse”).
Right key [46]
Warning [19] A warning is active.
Up key [47] Alarm (trip) [20] A (trip) alarm is active.
Down key [48] Alarm (trip lock) [21] A (Trip lock) alarm is active.
Comparator 4 [50] Comparator 0 [22] Use the result of comparator
Comparator 5 [51] 0.
Comparator 1 [23] Use the result of comparator
Logic rule 4 [60]
1.
Logic rule 5 [61]
Comparator 2 [24] Use the result of comparator
2.
Function:
Comparator 3 [25] Use the result of comparator
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to acti-
3.
vate Smart Logic Control.
Logic rule 0 [26] Use the result of logic rule 0.
False [0] enters the fixed value - FALSE.
Logic rule 1 [27] Use the result of logic rule 1.
True [1] enters the fixed value - TRUE.
Logic rule 2 [28] Use the result of logic rule 2.
Running [2] The motor is running.
Logic rule 3 [29] Use the result of logic rule 3.
In range [3] The motor is running within the pro-
Digital input DI18 [33] Use the result of digital in-
grammed current and speed ranges set in par.
put 18.
4-50 to par. 4-53.
Digital input DI19 [34] Use the result of digital in-
On reference [4] The motor is running on refer-
put 19.
ence.
Digital input DI27 [35] Use the result of digital in-
Torque limit [5] The torque limit, set in par. 4-16
put 27.
or 4-17, has been exceeded.
Digital input DI29 FC302Only [36] Use the result
Current limit [6] The motor current limit, set in
of digital input 29.
par. 4-18, has been exceeded.
Digital input DI32 [37] Use the result of digital in-
Out of current range [7] The motor current is out-
put 32.
side the range set in par. 4-18.
Digital input DI33 [38] Use the result of digital in-
Below I low [8] The motor current is lower than
put 33.
set in par. 4-50.
Start command [39] A start command is issued.
Above I high [9] The motor current is higher than
Drive stopped [40] A stop command ( Jog, Stop,
set in par. 4-51.
Qstop, Coast) is issued – and not from the SLC it-
Out of speed range [10] The speed is outside the
self.
range set in par. 4-52 and 4-53.
Reset Trip [41] A reset is issued

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 113

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Auto-reset Trip [42] An Auto reset is performed. SL Time-out 0 [30]

OK key [43] The Ok key is pressed. SL Time-out 1 [31]
Reset key [44] The reset key is pressed.
SL Time-out 2 [32]
Left key [45] The left key is pressed.
Digital input DI18 [33]
Right key [46] The right key is pressed.
Up key [47] The up key is pressed. Digital input DI19 [34]
Down key [48] The down key is pressed. Digital input DI27 [35]
Comparator 4 [50] Use the result of comparator Digital input DI29 (FC 302 only) [36]
4. Digital input DI32 [37]
Comparator 5 [51] Use the result of comparator
Digital input DI33 [38]
5.
Start command [39]
Logic rule 4 [60] Use the result of logic rule 4.
Logic rule 5 [61] Use the result of logic rule 5. Drive stopped [40]
Reset Trip [41]
Auto-reset Trip [42]
13-02 Stop Event Ok key [43]
Reset key [44]
Value:
Left key [45]
False [0]
Right key [46]
True [1]
Up key [47]
Running [2]
Down key [48]
In range [3]
Comparator 4 [50]
On reference [4]
Comparator 5 [51]
Torque limit [5]
Logic rule 4 [60]
Current limit [6]
Logic rule 5 [61]
Out of current range [7]
SL Time-out 3 [70]
Below I low [8]
SL Time-out 4 [71]
Above I high [9]
SL Time-out 5 [72]
Out of speed range [10]
SL Time-out 6 [73]
Below speed low [11]
SL Time-out 7 [74]
Above speed high [12]
Out of feedb. range [13] Function:
Below feedb. low [14] Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to acti-
Above feedb. high [15] vate Smart Logic Control.
Thermal warning [16] For descriptions [0] - [61], see 13-01 Start Event
SL Time-out 3 [70] Smart logic controller timer 3
Mains out of range [17]
is timed out.
Reversing [18]
SL Time-out 4 [71] Smart logic controller timer 4
Warning [19] is timed out.
Alarm (trip) [20] SL Time-out 5 [72] Smart logic controller timer 5
Alarm (trip lock) [21] is timed out.
Comparator 0 [22] SL- Time-out 6 [73] Smart logic controller timer 6
Comparator 1 [23] is timed out.
SL Time-out 7 [74] Smart logic controller timer 7
Comparator 2 [24]
is timed out.
Comparator 3 [25]
Logic rule 0 [26]
Logic rule 1 [27]
Logic rule 2 [28]
Logic rule 3 [29]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

114 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Pulse input FI33 [19]

13-03 Reset SLC
Alarm number [20]
Value: Counter A [30]
Do not reset SLC [0] Counter B [31]
Reset SLC [1] False [50]
True [51]
Function:
Control ready [52]
Select Reset SLC [1] to reset all group 13 param-
Drive ready [53]
eters (13-*) to default settings.
Select *Do not reset SLC [0] to retain the pro- Running [54]
grammed settings in all group 13 parameters (13- Reversing [55]
*). In range [56]
On reference [60]
13-1* Comparators Below reference, low [61]
Comparators are used for comparing continuous Above reference, high [62]
variables (i.e. output frequency, output current, Torque limit [65]
analog input etc.) to fixed preset values. In addi-
Current limit [66]
tion, there are digital values that will be compared
Out of current range [67]
to fixed time values. See explanation in par.
13-10. Comparators are evaluated once in each Below I low [68]
scan interval. Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) di- Above I hogh [69]
rectly. All parameters in this parameter group are Out of speed range [70]
array parameters with index 0 to 5. Select index Below speed low [71]
0 to programme Comparator 0, select index 1 to Above speed high [72]
programme Comparator 1, and so on.
Out of feedb. range [75]
Below feedb. low [76]
13-10 Comparator Operand
Above feedb. high [77]
Array [6]
Thermal warning [80]
Value: Mains out of range [82]
DISABLED [0] Warning [85]
Reference [1] Alarm (trip) [86]
Feedback [2] Alarm (trip lock) [87]
Motor speed [3] Bus OK [90]
Motor current [4] Torque limit & stop [91]
Motor torque [5] Brake fault (IGBT) [92]
Motor power [6] Mech. brake control [93]
Motor voltage [7] Safe stop active (FC 302 only) [94]
DC-link voltage [8] Comparator 0 [100]
Motor thermal [9] Comparator 1 [101]
VLT thermal [10] Comparator 2 [102]
Heat sink temp. [11] Comparator 3 [103]
Analog input AI53 [12] Comparator 4 [104]
Analog input AI54 [13] Comparator 5 [105]
Analog input AIFB10 [14] Logic rule 0 [110]
Analog input AIS24V [15] Logic rule 1 [111]
Analog input AICCT [17] Logic rule 2 [112]
Pulse input FI29 (FC 302 only) [18] Logic rule 3 [113]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 115

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Logic rule 4 [114] Motor torque [5] [Nm]

Logic rule 5 [115] Motor power [6] [kW] or [hp]
Motor voltage [7] [V]
SL Time-out 0 [120]
DC-link voltage [8] [V]
SL Time-out 1 [121]
Motor thermal [9] Expressed as a percentage.
SL Time-out 2 [122] VLT thermal [10] Expressed as a percentage.
SL Time-out 3 [123] Heat sink temp [11] Expressed as a percentage.
SL Time-out 4 [124] Analog input AI53 [12] Expressed as a percent-
SL Time-out 5 [125] age.
Analog input AI54 [13] Expressed as a percent-
SL Time-out 6 [126]
age.
SL Time-out 7 [127]
Analog input AIFB10 [14] [V]
Digital input DI18 [130] Analog input AIS24V [15] [V] Analog input AICCT
Digital input DI19 [131] [17] [°].
Digital input DI27 [132] Pulse input FI29 (FC302Only) [18] Expressed as a
Digital input DI29 [133] percentage.
Digital input DI32 [134] Pulse input FI33 [19] Expressed as a percentage.
Alarm number [20] The error number.
Digital input DI33 [135]
Counter A [30] Number of counts
SL digital output A [150]
Counter B [31] Number of counts
SL digital output B [151] False [50] Enters the fixed value of false in the
SL digital output C [152] comparator.
SL digital output D [153] True [51] Enters the fixed value of true in the
SL digital output E [154] comparator.
Control ready [52] The control board receives
SL digital output F [155]
supply voltage
Relay 1 [160]
Drive ready [53] The frequency converter is ready
Relay 2 [161] for operation and applies a supply signal on the
Local ref. active [180] control board.
Remote ref. active [181] Running [54] The motor is running.
Start command [182] Reversing [55] The output is high when the drive
Drive stopped [183] is running counter clockwise (the logical product
of the status bits “running” AND “reverse”)
Drive in hand mode [185]
In range [56] The motor is running within the pro-
Drive in auto mode [186]
grammed current and speed ranges set in par.
4-50 to par. 4-53.
Function:
On reference [60] The motor is running on refer-
Choice [1] to [31] are variables which will be com-
ence.
pared based on their values. Choice [50] to [186]
Below reference, low [61] The motor is running
are digital values (TRUE/FALSE) where the com-
below the value given in par. 4-54 “Warning Ref-
parison is based on the amount of time during
erence Low”
which they are set to TRUE or FALSE, respectively.
Above reference, high [62] The motor is running
See par. 13-11.
above the value given in par. 4-55 “Warning Ref-
Select the variable to be monitored by the com-
erence High”
parator.
Torque limit [65] The torque limit, set in par. 4-16
DISABLED [0] The comparator is disabled.
or 4-17, has been exceeded.
Reference [1] The resulting remote reference (not
Current limit [66] The motor current limit, set in
local) as a percentage.
par. 4-18, has been exceeded.
Feedback [2] In the unit [RPM] or [Hz]
Out of current range [67] The motor current is
Motor speed [3] [RPM] or [Hz]
outside the range set in par. 4-18.
Motor current [4] [A]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

116 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Below I low [68] The motor current is lower than SL Time-out 3 [123] The result of SLC timer 3.
set in par. 4-50. SL Time-out 4 [124] The result of SLC timer 4.
Above I high [69] The motor current is higher than SL Time-out 5 [125] The result of SLC timer 5.
set in par. 4-51. SL Time-out 6 [126] The result of SLC timer 6.
Out of speed range [70] The speed is outside the SL Time-out 7 [127] The result of SLC timer 7.
range set in par. 4-52 and 4-53. Digital input DI18 [130] Digital input 18. High =
Below speed low [71] The output speed is lower True.
than the setting in par. 4-52. Digital input DI19 [131] Digital input 19. High =
Above speed high [72] The output speed is higher True.
than the setting in par. 4-53. Digital input DI27 [132] Digital input 27. High =
Out of feedb. Range [75] The feedback is outside True.
the range set in par. 4-56 and 4-57. Digital input DI29 [133] Digital input 29. High =
Below feedb. Low [76] The feedback is below the True.
limit set in par. 4-56. Digital input DI32 [134] Digital input 32. High =
Above feedb. High [77] The feedback is above the True.
limit set in par. 4-57. Digital input DI33 [135] Digital input 33. High =
Thermal warning [80] The thermal warning turns True.
on when the temperature exceeds the limit in the SL digital output A [150] Use the result of the SLC
motor, the frequency converter, the brake resistor output A.
or thermistor. SL digital output B [151] Use the result of the SLC
Mains out of range [82] The mains voltage is out- output B.
side the specified voltage range. SL digital output C [152] Use the result of the SLC
Warning [85] A warning is active. output C.
Alarm (trip) [86] A (trip) alarm is active. SL digital output D [153] Use the result of the SLC
Alarm (trip lock) [87] A (Trip lock) alarm is active. output D.
Bus OK [90] Active communication (no time-out) SL digital output E [154] Use the result of the SLC
via the serial communication port. output E.
Torque limit & stop [91] If the frequency convert- SL digital output F [155] Use the result of the SLC
er has received a stop signal and is at the torque output F.
limit, the signal is logic “0”. Relay 1 [160] Relay 1 is active
Brake fault (IGBT) [92] The brake IGBT is short Relay 2 [161] Relay 2 is active
circuited. Local ref. active [180] High when par. 3-13 “Ref-
Mech. brake control [93] The mechanical brake is erence site” = [2] Local or when par 3-13 is [0]
active. Linked to hand Auto, at the same time as the LCP
Safe stop active (FC302Only) [94] Safe stop is ac- is in Hand on mode.
tive DI 37. Remote ref. active [181] High when par. 3-13
Comparator 0 [100] The result of comparator 0. “Reference site” = [1] Remote or [0] Linked to
Comparator 1 [101] The result of comparator 1. hand/auto, while the LCP is in Auto on mode.
Comparator 2 [102] The result of comparator 2. Start command [182] High when there is an active
Comparator 3 [103] The result of comparator 3. start command, and no stop command.
Comparator 4 [104] The result of comparator 4. Drive stopped [183] A stop command ( Jog, Stop,
Comparator 5 [105] The result of comparator 5. Qstop, Coast) is issued – and not from the SLC it-
Logic rule 0 [110] The result of Logic rule 0. self.
Logic rule 1 [111] The result of Logic rule 1. Drive in hand mode [185] High when the drive is
Logic rule 2 [112] The result of Logic rule 2. in hand mode.
Logic rule 3 [113] The result of Logic rule 3. Drive in auto mode [186] High when the drive is
Logic rule 4 [114] The result of Logic rule 4. in auto mode.
Logic rule 5 [115] The result of Logic rule 5.
SL Time-out 0 [120] The result of SLC timer 0.
SL Time-out 1 [121] The result of SLC timer 1. 13-11 Comparator Operator
SL Time-out 2 [122] The result of SLC timer 2.
Array [6]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 117

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Value: Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) from timers di-

< [0] rectly to define an event (see par. 13-51), or as
boolean input in a logic rule (see par. 13-40,
≈ [1]
13-42 or 13-44). A timer is only FALSE when star-
> [2]
ted by an action (i.e. Start timer 1 [29]) until the
TRUE longer than.. [5] timer value entered in this parameter is elapsed.
FALSE longer than.. [6] Then it becomes TRUE again.
TRUE shorter than.. [7] All parameters in this parameter group are array
FALSE shorter than.. [8] parameters with index 0 to 2. Select index 0 to
program Timer 0, select index 1 to program Timer
Function: 1, and so on.
For par. 13-10 containing values from [0] to [31]
the following is valid: 13-20 SL Controller Timer

Select the operator to be used in the comparison. Array [8]

Select < [0] for the result of the evaluation to be
TRUE, when the variable selected in par. 13-10 is Value:
smaller than the fixed value in par. 13-12. The re- 00:00:00.000 - 99:59:59.999 0.00s
sult will be FALSE, if the variable selected in par.
Function:
13-10 is greater than the fixed value in par.
Enter the value to define the duration of the FALSE
13-12.
output from the programmed timer. A timer is on-
Select > [2] for the inverse logic of option < [0].
ly FALSE if it is started by an action (i.e. Start
Select ≈ [1] for the result of the evaluation to be
timer 1 [29]) and until the given timer value has
TRUE, when the variable selected in par. 13-10 is
elapsed.
approximately equal to the fixed value in par.
13-12.
13-4* Logic Rules
If par. 13-10 is adjusted between [50] and [186]
Combine up to three boolean inputs (TRUE /
the following is valid:
FALSE inputs) from timers, comparators, digital
Select TRUE longer than [5] for the result of the inputs, status bits and events using the logical op-
evaluation to be TRUE, when the variable selected erators AND, OR, and NOT. Select boolean inputs
in par. 13-10 is TRUE longer than the fixed value for the calculation in par. 13-40, 13-42, and
in par. 13-12. The result will be FALSE, if the var- 13-44. Define the operators used to logically com-
iable selected in par. 13-10 is TRUE shorter than bine the selected inputs in par. 13-41 and 13-43.
the fixed value in par. 13-12. Select TRUE shorter
Priority of calculation
than [7] for the inverse logic of option TRUE lon-
The results of par. 13-40, 13-41, and 13-42 are
ger than [5].
calculated first. The outcome (TRUE / FALSE) of
this calculation is combined with the settings of
par. 13-43 and 13-44, yielding the final result
13-12 Comparator Value
(TRUE / FALSE) of the logic rule.
Array [6]
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
Value:
Array [6]
-100000.000 - 100000.000 0.000
Function: Value:
Enter the ‘trigger level’ for the variable that is
False [0]
monitored by this comparator. This is an array
True [1]
parameter containing comparator values 0 to 5.
Running [2]
In range [3]
13-2* Timers
On reference [4]
This parameter group consists of timer parame-
ters.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

118 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Torque limit [5] Comparator 5 [51]

Current limit [6] Logic rule 4 [60]
Out of current range [7] Logic rule 5 [61]
Below I low [8] SL Time-out 3 [70]
Above I high [9] SL Time-out 4 [71]
Out of speed range [10] SL Time-out 5 [72]
Below speed low [11] SL Time-out 6 [73]
Above speed high [12] SL Time-out 7 [74]
Out of feedb. range [13]
Function:
Below feedb. low [14]
Select the first boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for
Above feedb. high [15]
the selected logic rule.
Thermal warning [16] See par. 13-01 Start Event ([0] - [61]) and par.
Mains voltage out of range [17] 13-02 Stop Event ([70] - [74]) for further de-
Reversing [18] scription.
Warning [19]
Alarm (trip) [20]
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
Alarm (trip lock) [21]
Comparator 0 [22] Array [6]

Comparator 1 [23]
Value:
Comparator 2 [24]
DISABLED [0]
Comparator 3 [25]
AND [1]
Logic rule 0 [26]
OR [2]
Logic rule 1 [27]
AND NOT [3]
Logic rule 2 [28]
OR NOT [4]
Logic rule 3 [29]
NOT AND [5]
SL Time-out 0 [30]
Not or [6]
SL Time-out 1 [31]
Not and not [7]
SL Time-out 2 [32]
Not or not [8]
Digital input DI18 [33]
Digital input DI19 [34] Function:
Digital input DI27 [35] Select the first logical operator to use on the Boo-
Digital input DI29 (FC 302 only) [36] lean inputs from par. 13-40 and 13-42.
[13 -XX] signifies the boolean input of par. 13-*.
Digital input DI32 [37]
Select DISABLED [0] to ignore par. 13-42, 13-43,
Digital input DI33 [38]
and 13-44.
Start command [39] AND [1] evaluates the expression [13-40] AND
Drive stopped [40] [13-42].
Reset Trip [41] OR [2] evaluates the expression [13-40] OR
Auto-reset Trip [42] [13-42].
Ok key [43] AND NOT [3] evaluates the expression [13-40]
AND NOT [13-42].
Reset key [44]
OR NOT [4] evaluates the expression [13-40] OR
Left key [45]
NOT [13-42].
Right key [46] NOT AND [5] evaluates the expression NOT
Up key [47] [13-40] AND [13-42].
Down key [48] NOT OR [6] evaluates the expression NOT [13-40]
Comparator 4 [50] OR [13-42].

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 119

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

NOT AND NOT [7] evaluates the expression NOT Digital input DI29 (FC 302 only) [36]
[13-40] AND NOT [13-42]. Digital input DI32 [37]
NOT OR NOT [8] evaluates the expression NOT
Digital input DI33 [38]
[13-40] OR NOT [13-42].
Start command [39]
Drive stopped [40]
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 Reset Trip [41]
Auto-reset Trip [42]
Array [6]
Ok key [43]
Value: Reset key [44]
False [0] Left key [45]
True [1] Right key [46]
Running [2] Up key [47]
In range [3] Down key [48]
On reference [4] Comparator 4 [50]
Torque limit [5] Comparator 5 [51]
Current limit [6] Logic rule 4 [60]
Out of current range [7] Logic rule 5 [61]
Below I low [8] SL Time-out 3 [70]
Above I high [9] SL Time-out 4 [71]
Out of speed range [10] SL Time-out 5 [72]
Below speed low [11] SL Time-out 6 [73]
Above speed high [12] SL Time-out 7 [74]
Out of feedb. range [13]
Function:
Below feedb. low [14]
Select the second boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input
Above feedb. high [15] for the selected logic rule. See par. 13-01 Start
Thermal warning [16] Event ([0] - [61]) and par. 13-02 Stop Event ([70]
Mains out of range [17] - [74]) for further description.
Reversing [18]
Warning [19]
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
Alarm (trip) [20]
Alarm (trip lock) [21] Array [6]
Comparator 0 [22]
Value:
Comparator 1 [23]
DISABLED [0]
Comparator 2 [24]
AND [1]
Comparator 3 [25]
OR [2]
Logic rule 0 [26]
AND NOT [3]
Logic rule 1 [27]
OR NOT [4]
Logic rule 2 [28]
NOT AND [5]
Logic rule 3 [29]
NOT OR [6]
SL Time-out 0 [30]
NOT AND NOT [7]
SL Time-out 1 [31]
NOT OR NOT [8]
SL Time-out 2 [32]
Digital input DI18 [33]
Digital input DI19 [34]
Digital input DI27 [35]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

120 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Mains out of range [17]

Select the second logical operator to be used on Reversing [18]
the boolean input calculated in par. 13-40, 13-41, Warning [19]
and 13-42, and the boolean input coming from
Alarm (trip) [20]
par. 13-42.
Alarm (trip lock) [21]
[13-44] signifies the boolean input of par. 13-44.
[13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input calcu- Comparator 0 [22]
lated in par. 13-40, 13-41, and 13-42. DISABLED Comparator 1 [23]
[0] (factory setting). select this option to ignore Comparator 2 [24]
par. 13-44. Comparator 3 [25]
AND [1] evaluates the expression [13-40/13-42]
Logic rule 0 [26]
AND [13-44].
Logic rule 1 [27]
OR [2] evaluates the expression [13-40/13-42]
OR [13-44]. Logic rule 2 [28]
AND NOT [3] evaluates the expression Logic rule 3 [29]
[13-40/13-42] AND NOT [13-44]. SL Time-out 0 [30]
OR NOT [4] evaluates the expression SL Time-out 1 [31]
[13-40/13-42] OR NOT [13-44]. SL Time-out 2 [32]
NOT AND [5] evaluates the expression NOT
Digital input DI18 [33]
[13-40/13-42] AND [13-44].
Digital input DI19 [34]
NOT OR [6] evaluates the expression NOT
[13-40/13-42] OR [13-44]. Digital input DI27 [35]
NOT AND NOT [7] evaluates the expression NOT Digital input DI29 (FC 302 only) [36]
[13-40/13-42] and evaluates AND NOT [13-44]. Digital input DI32 [37]
NOT OR NOT [8] evaluates the expression NOT Digital input DI33 [38]
[13-40/13-42] OR NOT [13-44].
Start command [39]
Drive stopped [40]

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 Reset Trip [41]

Auto-reset Trip [42]
Array [6]
Ok key [43]
Value: Reset key [44]
False [0] Left key [45]
True [1] Right key [46]
Running [2] Up key [47]
In range [3] Down key [48]
On reference [4] Comparator 4 [50]
Torque limit [5] Comparator 5 [51]
Current limit [6] Logic rule 4 [60]
Out of current range [7] Logic rule 5 [61]
Below I low [8] SL Time-out 3 [70]
Above I high [9] SL Time-out 4 [71]
Out of speed range [10] SL Time-out 5 [72]
Below speed low [11] SL Time-out 6 [73]
Above speed high [12] SL Time-out 7 [74]
Out of feedb. range [13]
Function:
Below feedb. low [14]
Select the third boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for
Above feedb. high [15] the selected logic rule. See par. 13-01 Start Event
Thermal warning [16]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 121

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

([0] - [61]) and par. 13-02 Stop Event ([70] - Digital input DI27 [35]
[74]) for further description. Digital input DI29 (FC 302 only) [36]
Digital input DI32 [37]
13-5* States Digital input DI33 [38]
Parameters for programming the Smart Logic
Start command [39]
Controller.
Drive stopped [40]
Reset Trip [41]
13-51 SL Controller Event
Auto-reset Trip [42]
Array [20]
Ok key [43]
Value: Reset key [44]
False [0] Left key [45]
True [1] Right key [46]
Running [2] Up key [47]
In range [3] Down key [48]
On reference [4] Comparator 4 [50]
Torque limit [5] Comparator 5 [51]
Current limit [6] Logic rule 4 [60]
Out of current range [7] Logic rule 5 [61]
Below I low [8] SL Time-out 3 [70]
Above I high [9] SL Time-out 4 [71]
Out of speed range [10] SL Time-out 5 [72]
Below speed low [11] SL Time-out 6 [73]
Above speed high [12] SL Time-out 7 [74]
Out of feedb. range [13]
Function:
Below feedb. low [14]
Select the boolean input (TRUE or FALSE) to de-
Above feedb. high [15] fine the Smart Logic Controller event.See par.
Thermal warning [16] 13-01 Start Event ([0] - [61]) and par. 13-02 Stop
Mains out of range [17] Event ([70] - [74]) for further description.
Reversing [18]
Warning [19]
13-52 SL Controller Action
Alarm (trip) [20]
Alarm (trip lock) [21] Array [20]
Comparator 0 [22]
Value:
Comparator 1 [23]
Disabled [0]
Comparator 2 [24]
No action [1]
Comparator 3 [25]
Select set-up 1 [2]
Logic rule 0 [26]
Select set-up 2 [3]
Logic rule 1 [27]
Select set-up 3 [4]
Logic rule 2 [28]
Select set-up 4 [5]
Logic rule 3 [29]
Select preset reference 0 [10]
SL Time-out 0 [30]
Select preset reference 1 [11]
SL Time-out 1 [31]
Select preset reference 2 [12]
SL Time-out 2 [32]
Select preset reference 3 [13]
Digital input DI18 [33]
Select preset reference 4 [14]
Digital input DI19 [34]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

122 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Select preset reference 5 [15] Select set-up 1 [2] - changes the active set-up
Select preset reference 6 [16] (par. 0-10) to ‘1’.
Select set-up 2 [3] - changes the active set-up
Select preset reference 7 [17]
(par. 0-10) to ‘2’.
Select ramp 1 [18]
Select set-up 3 [4] - changes the active set-up
Select ramp 2 [19] (par. 0-10) to ‘3’.
Select ramp 3 [20] Select set-up 4 [5] - changes the active set-up
Select ramp 4 [21] (par. 0-10) to ‘4’. If the set-up is changed, it will
Run [22] merge with other set-up commands coming from
either the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
Run reverse [23]
Select preset reference 0 [10] – selects preset
Stop [24]
reference 0.
Qstop [25] Select preset reference 1 [11] – selects preset
Dcstop [26] reference 1.
Coast [27] Select preset reference 2 [12] – selects preset
Freeze output [28] reference 2.
Start timer 0 [29] Select preset reference 3 [13] – selects preset
reference 3.
Start timer 1 [30]
Select preset reference 4 [14] – selects preset
Start timer 2 [31]
reference 4.
Set digital output A low [32] Select preset reference 5 [15] – selects preset
Set digital output B low [33] reference 5.
Set digital output C low [34] Select preset reference 6 [16] – selects preset
Set digital output D low [35] reference 6.
Select preset reference 7 [17] - selects preset ref-
Set digital output E low [36]
erence 7. If the active preset reference is
Set digital output F low [37]
changed, it will merge with other preset reference
Set digital output A high [38] commands coming from either the digital inputs
Set digital output B high [39] or via a fieldbus.
Set digital output C high [40] Select ramp 1 [18] - selects ramp 1.
Set digital output D high [41] Select ramp 2 [19] - selects ramp 2.
Set digital output E high [42] Select ramp 3 [20] - selects ramp 3.
Select ramp 4 [21] - selects ramp 4.
Set digital output F high [43]
Run [22] - issues a start command to the fre-
Reset Counter A [60]
quency converter.
Reset Counter B [61] Run reverse [23] - issues a start reverse com-
Start Timer 3 [70] mand to the frequency converter.
Start Timer 4 [71] Stop [24] - issues a stop command to the fre-
Start Timer 5 [72] quency converter.
Qstop [25] - issues a quick stop command to the
Start Timer 6 [73]
frequency converter.
Start Timer 7 [74]
Dcstop [26] - issues a DC stop command to the
frequency converter.
Function:
Coast [27] - the frequency converter coasts im-
Select the action corresponding to the SLC event.
mediately. All stop commands including the coast
Actions are executed when the corresponding
command stop the SLC.
event (defined in par. 13-51) is evaluated as true.
Freeze output [28] - freezes the output frequency
The following actions are available for selection:
of the frequency converter.
*DISABLED [0]
Start timer 0 [29] - starts timer 0, see par. 13-20
No action [1]
for further description.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 123

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Start timer 1 [30] - starts timer 1, see par. 13-20

for further description.
Start timer 2 [31] - starts timer 2, see par. 13-20
for further description.
Set digital output A low [32] - any output with SL
output A will be low.
Set digital output B low [33] - any output with SL
output B will be low.
Set digital output C low [34] - any output with SL
output Cwill be low.
Set digital output D low [35] - any output with SL
output Dwill be low.
Set digital output E low [36] - any output with SL
output E will be low.
Set digital output F low [37] - any output with SL
output F will be low.
Set digital output A high [38] - any output with SL
output A will be high.
Set digital output B high [39] - any output with SL
output B will be high.
Set digital output C high [40] - any output with SL
output C will be high.
Set digital output D high [41] - any output with SL
output D will be high.
Set digital output E high [42] - any output with SL
output E will be high.
Set digital output F high [43] - any output with SL
output Fwill be high.
Reset Counter A [60] - resets Counter A to zero.
Reset Counter B [61] - resets Counter B to zero.
Start Timer 3 [70] - Start Timer 3, see par. 13-20
for further description.
Start Timer 4 [71] - Start Timer 4, see par. 13-20
for further description.
Start Timer 5 [72] - Start Timer 5, see par. 13-20
for further description.
Start Timer 6 [73] - Start Timer 6, see par. 13-20
for further description.
Start Timer 7 [74] - Start Timer 7, see par. 13-20
for further description.

124 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Special Func- Special conditions in the FC 300 De-

tions sign Guide.

NB!
14-** Special Functions
Switching frequencies higher than 5.0
Parameter group for configuring special frequency
kHz lead to automatic derating of the
converter functions.
maximum output of the frequency
Inverter Switching, 14-0* converter.
Parameters for configuring the inverter switching.

14-00 Switching Pattern 14-03 Overmodulation

Value: Value:
60 AVM [0] Off [0]
SFAVM [1] On [1]

Function: Function:
Select the switching pattern: 60° AVM or SFAVM. Select On [1] to connect the overmodulation func-
tion for the output voltage, to obtain an output
voltage up to 15% greater than the mains volt-
14-01 Switching Frequency age.
Value: Select Off [0] for no overmodulation of the output
voltage, in order to avoid torque ripple on the mo-
1.0 kHz [0]
tor shaft. This feature may be useful for applica-
1.5 kHz [1]
tions such as grinding machines.
2.0 kHz [2]
2.5 kHz [3]
3.0 kHz [4]
3.5 kHz [5] 14-04 PWM Random
4.0 kHz [6] Value:
5.0 kHz [7] Off [0]
6.0 kHz [8] On [1]
7.0 kHz [9]
Function:
8.0 kHz [10]
Select On [1] to transform the acoustic motor
10.0 kHz [11] switching noise from a clear ring tone into a less
12.0 kHz [12] discernable ‘white’ noise. This is achieved by
14.0 kHz [13] slightly and randomly altering the synchronism of
16.0 kHz [14] the pulse width modulated output phases.
Select Off [0] for no change to the acoustic motor
Function: switching noise.
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing
the switching frequency can help to reduce acous- 14-1* Mains On/Off
tic noise from the motor.
Parameters for configuring mains failure monitor-
NB! ing and handling. If a mains failure appears, the
The output frequency value of the fre- frequency converter will try to continue in a con-
quency converter must never exceed trolled way until the power in the DC link has been
1/10 of the switching frequency. When exhausted.
the motor is running, adjust the
switching frequency in par. 4-11 until
the motor is as noiseless as possible.
See also par. 14-00 and the section

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 125

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

1. The power is back before the energy from

14-10 Mains Failure DC /moment of inertia from load is too
Value: low. The frequency converter will perform
No function [0] a controlled ramp down when par 14-11
Controlled ramp-down [1] level has been reached.
Controlled ramp-down, trip [2] 2. The frequency converter will perform a
Coasting [3] controlled ramp down as long as energy in
Kinetic back-up [4] the DC link is present. After this point the
motor will be coasted.
Kinetic back-up, trip [5]
Alarm [6] Kinetic back-up:
The frequency converter will perform a Kinetic
Function: back-up. If par. 2-10 is [0] or AC brake [2] Off,
Function: Select the function to which the fre- the ramp will follow the Over Voltage Ramping. If
quency converter must act when the threshold in par. 2-10 is [1] Resistor Brake the ramp will follow
par 14-11 has been reached. the setting in par. 3-81 Quick stop ramp time.
Par 14-10 cannot be changed while motor is run- Kinetic Back-up [4]: The frequency converter will
ning. ride through on speed as long as the energy is
Controlled ramp down: present from moment of inertia from the load.
The frequency converter will perform a controlled Kinetic Back-up [5]: The frequency converter will
ramp down. If Par 2-10 is [0] or AC brake [2] Off ride through on speed as long as the energy is
the ramp will follow the Over Voltage Ramping. If present from moment of inertia from the load. If
Par 2-10 is [1] Resistor Brake the ramp will follow the DC voltage goes below par. 14-11 the fre-
the setting in par 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. quency converter will perform a trip.
Controlled ramp-down [1]:
After power-up the frequency converter is ready
for start. Controlled ramp-down and trip [2]: After
power-up the frequency converter needs a reset
for starting.

14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

Value:
150 - 600 V 342 V

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

126 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Function:
This parameter defines the threshold voltage at Select the reset function after tripping. Once re-
which the selected function in par. 14-10 should set, the frequency converter can be restarted.
be activated. Select Manual reset [0], to perform a reset via
[RESET] or via the digital inputs.
Select Automatic reset x 1…x20 [1]-[12] to per-
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance form between one and twenty automatic resets
Value: after tripping.
Trip [0] Select Infinite Automatic Reset [13] for continu-
ous resetting after tripping.
Warning [1]
Disabled [2] NB!
The motor may start without warning.
Function: If the specified number of AUTOMATIC
When a severe mains imbalance is detected: RESETs is reached within 10 minutes,
Select Trip [0] to trip the frequency converter; the frequency converter enters Manual
Select Warning [1] to issue a warning; or reset [0] mode. After the Manual reset
Select Disabled [2] for no action. is performed, the setting of par. 14-20
Operation under severe main imbalance condi- reverts to the original selection. If the
tions reduces the lifetime of the motor. Conditions number of automatic resets is not
are considered severe if the motor is operated reached within 10 minutes, or when a
continuously near nominal load (e.g. a pump or Manual reset is performed, the internal
fan running near full speed). AUTOMATIC RESET counter returns to
zero.
Trip Reset, 14-2* NB!
Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, Automatic reset will also be active for
special trip handling and control card self test or resetting safe stop function in firm-
initialisation. ware version < 4.3x.

14-20 Reset Mode

Value: 14-21 Automatic Restart Time

Manual reset [0] Value:

Automatic reset x 1 [1] 0 - 600 s 10s

Automatic reset x 2 [2] Function:

Enter the time interval from trip to start of the
Automatic reset x 3 [3]
automatic reset function. This parameter is active
Automatic reset x 4 [4]
when par. 14-20 is set to Automatic reset [1] -
Automatic reset x 5 [5] [13].
Automatic reset x 6 [6]
Automatic reset x 7 [7]
Automatic reset x 8 [8] 14-22 Operation Mode
Automatic reset x 9 [9] Value:
Automatic reset x 10 [10] Normal operation [0]
Automatic reset x 15 [11] Control card test [1]
Automatic reset x 20 [12] Initialisation [2]
Infinite Automatic Reset [13]
Function:
Use this parameter to specify normal operation;
to perform tests; or to initialise all parameters ex-

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 127

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

cept par. 15-03, 15-04 and 15-05. This function is

active only when the power is cycled to the fre-
quency converter.
Select Normal operation [0] for normal operation
of the frequency converter with the motor in the
selected application.
Select Control card test [1] to test the analog and
digital inputs and outputs and the +10 V control
voltage. The test requires a test connector with
internal connections. Use the following procedure
for the control card test:
1. Select Control card test [1].
2. Disconnect the mains supply and wait for
the light in the display to go out.
3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54)
= ‘ON’ / I.
4. Insert the test plug (see below).
5. Connect to mains supply. Select Initialization [2] to reset all parameter val-
ues to default settings, except for par. 15-03,
6. Carry out various tests.
15-04, and 15-05. The frequency converter will
7. The results are displayed on the LCP and reset during the next power-up.
the frequency converter moves into an in- Par. 14-22 will also revert to the default setting
finite loop. Normal operation [0].
8. Par. 14-22 is automatically set to Normal
operation. Carry out a power cycle to start
up in Normal operation after a control 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit
card test. Value:
0 - 60 s 60 s
If the test is OK:
LCP read-out: Control Card OK. Function:
Disconnect the mains supply and remove the test Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds. When
plug. The green LED on the Control Card will light the output torque reaches the torque limits (par.
up. 4-16 and 4-17), a warning is triggered. When the
torque limit warning has been continuously
If the test fails:
present for the period specified in this parameter,
LCP read-out: Control Card I/O failure.
the frequency converter trips. Disable the trip de-
Replace the frequency converter or Control card.
lay by setting the parameter to 60 s = OFF. Ther-
The red LED on the Control Card is turned on. Test
mal monitoring of the frequency converter will still
plugs (connect the following terminals to each
remain active.
other): 18 - 27 - 32; 19 - 29 - 33; 42 - 53 - 54

14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault

Value:
0 - 30 s [Size related]

Function:
When the frequency converter detects an over-
voltage in the set time trip will be effected after
the set time.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

128 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

14-29 Service Code Function:

Value: Controls the current limit control integration time.
000000 Hex - FFFFF 000000 Setting it to a lower value makes it react faster. A
Function: setting too low leads to control instabillity.
For internal sevice only.
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-3* Current Limit Control Parameters for adjusting the energy optimisation
The FC 300 Series features an integral Current level in both Variable Torque (VT) and Automatic
Limit Controller which is activated when the motor Energy Optimization (AEO) mode in par. 1-03.
current, and thus the torque, is higher than the
torque limits set in par. 4-16 and 4-17.
When the current limit is reached during motor 14-40 VT Level
operation or regenerative operation, the frequen- Value:
cy converter will try to reduce torque below the 40 - 90% 66%
preset torque limits as quickly as possible without Function:
losing control of the motor. Enter the level of motor magnetisation at low
While the current control is active, the frequency speed. Selection of a low value reduces energy
converter can only be stopped by setting a digital loss in the motor, but also reduces load capability.
input to Coast inverse [2] or Coast and reset inv. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
[3]. Any signal on terminals 18 to 33 will not be tor is running.
active until the frequency converter is no longer
near the current limit.
By using a digital input set to Coast inverse [2] or
Coast and reset inv. [3], the motor does not use 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation
the ramp-down time, since the drive is coasted. If
Value:
a quick stop is necessary, use the mechanical
40 - 75% 40%
brake control function along with an external elec-
tro-mechanical brake attached to the application. Function:
Enter the minimum allowable magnetisation for
AEO. Selection of a low value reduces energy loss
Current Lim Cont, Proportional in the motor, but can also reduce resistance to
14-30 sudden load changes.
Gain
Value:
0 - 500 % 100 %
Function: 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency
Enter the proportional gain value for the current
Value:
limit controller. Selection of a high value makes
5 - 40 Hz 10Hz
the controller react faster. Too high a setting leads
to controller instability. Function:
Enter the minimum frequency at which the Auto-
matic Energy Optimisation (AEO) is to be active.

Current Lim Contr, Integration

14-31 14-43 Motor Cosphi
Time
Value: Value:

0.002 - 2.000 s 0.40 - 0.95 0.66

0.020 s
Function:
The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set for op-
timum AEO performance. This parameter should

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 129

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

normally not be altered. However in some situa- Function:

tions it may be necessary to enter a new value to Select which reaction the frequency converter
fine-tune. should take in case a fan fault is detected.

Environment, 14-5*
These parameters help the frequency converter to
operate under special environmental conditions. 14-55 Output Filter
Value:
No filter [0]
14-50 RFI 1 Sine-Wave Filter [1]
Value:
Off [0] Function:
Select the type of output filter connected. This pa-
On [1]
rameter cannot be adjusted while motor is run-
Function: ning.
Select On [1] to ensure the frequency converter
complies with EMC standards.
Select Off [0] only when the frequency converter 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter
is supplied from an isolated mains source, i.e. IT Value:
mains. In this mode, the internal RFI capacities 0.1 - 6500.0 µF 2.0 µF
(filter capacitors) between chassis and the Mains Function:
RFI Filter circuit are cut off to avoid damage to the Set the capacitance of the output filter. The value
intermediate circuit and to reduce the earth ca- can be found on the filter label.
pacity currents (according to IEC 61800-3).
NB!
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
This is required for correct compensa-
tion in Flux mode (par. 1-01)

14-52 Fan Control

Value:
14-57 Inductance Output Filter
Auto [0]
Value:
On 50% [1]
0.001 - 65.000 mH 7.000 mH
On 75% [2]
Function:
On 100% [3]
Set the inductance of the output filter. The value
can be found on the filter label.
Function:
Select minimum speed of internal fan. NB!
Select Auto [0] to run fan only when internal tem- This is required for correct compensa-
perature in frequency converter is in range 35° C tion in Flux mode (par. 1-01)
to approx. 55° C.
Fan runs at low speed below 35° C, and at full
14-7* Compatibility
speed at approx. 55° C.
This parameter is for setting of compatibility for
VLT 3000, VLT 5000 to FC 300

14-53 Fan Monitor 14-72 VLT Alarm Word

Value: Value:
0 - 4294967295 0
Disabled [0]
Warning [1] Function:
Read out the alarm word corresponding to VLT
Trip [2]
3000 or VLT 5000

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

130 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

14-73 VLT Warning Word

Value:
15-02 kWh Counter
0 - 4294967295 0
Value:
Function:
0 - 2147483647 kWh 0kWh
Read out the warning word corresponding to VLT
3000 or VLT 5000 Function:
View the power consumption from mains in kWh
as a mean value over one hour. Reset the counter
14-74 VLT Ext. Status Word in par. 15-06.

Value:
0 - 4294967295 0
Function: 15-03 Power Up's
Read out the ext. status word corresponding to
Value:
VLT 3000 or VLT 5000
0 - 2147483647 0
Function:
Parameters: Drive Informa- View the number of times the frequency converter
tion has been powered up.

15-** Drive Information

Parameter group containing frequency converter
information such as operating data, hardware 15-04 Over Temp's
configuration and software versions. Value:
15-0* Operating Data 0 - 65535 0
Parameter group containing operating data e.g. Function:
Operating Hours, kWh counters, Power Ups, etc. View the number of frequency converter temper-
ature faults which have occurred.

15-00 Operating Hours

Value:
0 - 2147483647 h 0h 15-05 Over Volt's
Function: Value:
View how many hours the frequency converter 0 - 65535 0
has run. The value is saved when the frequency Function:
converter is turned off. View the number of frequency converter overvol-
tages which have occurred.

15-01 Running Hours

Value: 15-06 Reset kWh Counter
0 - 2147483647 h 0h Value:
Function: *Do not reset [0]
View how many hours the motor has run. Reset Reset counter [1]
the counter in par. 15-07. The value is saved
when the frequency converter is turned off. Function:
Select Reset [1] and press [OK] to reset the kWh
counter to zero (see par 15-02). This parameter
cannot be selected via the serial port, RS 485.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 131

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Select Do not reset [0] if no reset of the kWh 16-32 Brake Energy / s
counter is desired. 16-33 Brake Energy / 2 min
NB! 16-34 Heatsink Temp.
The reset is carried out by pressing 16-35 Inverter Thermal
[OK]. 16-50 External Reference
16-51 Pulse Reference
16-52 Feedback [Unit]
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit]
Value:
16-55 Feedback 2 [Unit]
Do not reset [0]
16-56 Feedback 3 [Unit]
Reset counter [1]
16-60 Digital Input
Function: 16-62 Analog Input 53
Select Reset [1] and press [OK] to reset the Run- 16-64 Analog Input 54
ning Hours counter to zero (see par. 15-01). This 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
parameter cannot be selected via the serial port, 16-66 Digital Output [bin]
RS 485.
16-75 Analog In X30/11
Select Do not reset [0] if no reset of the Running
16-76 Analog In X30/12
Hours counter is desired.
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
16-90 Alarm Word
Data Log Settings, 15-1*
The Data Log enables continuous logging of up to 16-92 Warning Word
4 data sources (par. 15-10) at individual rates 16-94 Extended Status Word
(par. 15-11). A trigger event (par. 15-12) and 34-70 MCO Alarm Word 1
window (par. 15-14) are used to start and stop 34-71 MCO Alarm Word 2
the logging conditionally.
Function:
15-10 Logging Source Select which variables are to be logged.
Array [4]

Value:
None 15-11 Logging Interval

14-72 VLT Alarm Word Value:

14-73 VLT Warning Word 1 - 86400000 ms 1ms

14-74 VLT Ext. Status Word Function:

Enter the interval in milliseconds between each
16-00 Control Word
sampling of the variables to be logged.
16-01 Reference [Unit]
16-02 Reference %
16-03 Status Word 15-12 Trigger Event
16-10 Power [kW]
Value:
16-11 Power [hp]
*False [0]
16-12 Motor Voltage
True [1]
16-13 Frequency
Running [2]
16-14 Motor Current
In range [3]
16-16 Torque
On reference [4]
16-17 Speed [RPM]
Torque limit [5]
16-18 Motor Thermal
Current limit [6]
16-30 DC Link Voltage

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

132 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Out of current range [7] Log once on trigger [1]

Below I low [8]
Function:
Above I high [9]
Select Log always [0] for continuous logging.
Out of speed range [10]
Select Log once on trigger [1] to conditionally
Below speed low [11] start and stop logging using par. 15-12 and par.
Above speed high [12] 15-14.
Out of feedb. range [13]
Below feedb. low [14]
15-14 Samples Before Trigger
Above feedb. high [15]
Value:
Thermal warning [16]
0 - 100 50
Mains voltage out of range [17]
Function:
Reversing [18]
Enter the percentage of all samples prior to a trig-
Warning [19]
ger event which are to be retained in the log. See
Alarm (trip) [20] also par. 15-12 and par. 15-13.
Alarm (trip lock) [21]
Comparator 0 [22] Historic Log,15-2*
Comparator 1 [23] View up to 50 logged data items via the array pa-
Comparator 2 [24] rameters in this parameter group. For all param-
Comparator 3 [25] eters in the group, [0] is the most recent data and
Logic rule 0 [26] [49] the oldest data. Data is logged every time an
Logic rule 1 [27] event occurs (not to be confused with SLC
events). Events in this context are defined as a
Logic rule 2 [28]
change in one of the following areas:
Logic rule 3 [29]
1. Digital input
Digital input DI18 [33]
Digital input DI19 [34] 2. Digital outputs (not monitored in this SW
release)
Digital input DI27 [35]
Digital input DI29 (FC 302 only) [36] 3. Warning word
Digital input DI32 [37] 4. Alarm word
Digital input DI33 [38] 5. Status word
Comparator 4 [50]
6. Control word
Comparator 5 [51]
7. Extended status word
Logic rule 4 [60]
Events are logged with value, and time stamp in
Logic rule 5 [61]
msec. The time interval between two events de-
Function: pends on how often events occur (maximum once
Select the trigger event. When the trigger event every scan time). Data logging is continuous but
occurs, a window is applied to freeze the log. The if an alarm occurs, the log is saved and the values
log will then retain a specified percentage of sam- can be viewed on the display. This feature is use-
ples before the occurrence of the trigger event ful, for example when carrying out service follow-
(par. 15-14). ing a trip. View the historic log contained in this
parameter via the serial communication port or
via the display.

15-13 Logging Mode

15-20 Historic Log: Event
Value:
Log always [0] Array [50]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 133

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Value:
Value:
0 - 255 0
0 - 255 0
Function:
Function:
View the event type of the logged events.
View the error code and look up its meaning in the
Troubleshooting chapter of the FC 300 Design
Guide.

15-21 Historic Log: Value

Array [50]
15-31 Fault Log: Value
Value:
0 - 2147483647 0 Array [10]

Function:
Value:
View the value of the logged event. Interpret the
-32767 - 32767 0
event values according to this table:
Function:
Digtal input Decimal value. See par. 16-60 for de- View an extra description of the error. This pa-
scription after converting to binary
value. rameter is mostly used in combination with alarm
Digital output (not Decimal value. See par. 16-66 for de- 38 ‘internal fault’.
monitored in this SW scription after converting to binary
release) value.
Warning word Decimal value. See par. 16-92 for de-
scription.
Alarm word Decimal value. See par. 16-90 for de-
scription.
Status word Decimal value. See par. 16-03 for de-
15-32 Fault Log: Time
scription after converting to binary
value. Array [10]
Control word Decimal value. See par. 16-00 for de-
scription.
Extended status Decimal value. See par. 16-94 for de- Value:
word scription.
0 - 2147483647 0
Function:
View the time when the logged event occurred.
Time is measured in seconds from frequency con-
15-22 Historic Log: Time verter start-up.
Array [50]
Drive Identification, 15-4*
Value:
Parameters containing read only information
0 - 2147483647 0 about the hardware and software configuration of
Function: the frequency converter.
View the time at which the logged event occurred.
Time is measured in ms since frequency converter 15-40 FC Type
start.
Function:
View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the
Fault Log, 15-3* FC 300 Series power field of the type code defini-
Parameters in this group are array parameters, tion, characters 1-6.
where up to 10 fault logs can be viewed. [0] is the
most recent logged data, and [9] the oldest. Error
codes, values, and time stamp can be viewed for 15-41 Power Section
all logged data. Function:
View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the
FC 300 Series power field of the type code defini-
15-30 Fault Log: Error Code tion, characters 7-10.
Array [10]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

134 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

15-42 Voltage 15-49 SW ID Control Card

Function: Function:
View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the View the control card software version number.
FC 300 Series power field of the type code defini-
tion, characters 11-12.

15-50 SW ID Power Card

Function:
15-43 Software Version View the power card software version number.
Function:
View the combined SW version (or ‘package ver-
sion’) consisting of power SW and control SW.
Frequency Converter Serial Num-
15-51
ber
Function:
15-44 Ordered Typecode String View the frequency converter serial number.
Function:
View the type code string used for re-ordering the
frequency converter in its original configuration.
15-53 Power Card Serial Number
Function:
View the power card serial number.
15-45 Actual Typecode String
Function: Option Ident. 15-6*
View the actual type code string.
This read-only parameter group contains informa-
tion about the hardware and software configura-
tion of the options installed in slots A, B C0 and
C1.
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No
Function:
View the 8-digit ordering number used for re-or- 15-60 Option Mounted
dering the frequency converter in its original con-
Function:
figuration.
View the installed option type.

15-47 Power Card Ordering No

15-61 Option SW Version
Function:
Function:
View the power card ordering number.
View the installed option software version.

15-48 LCP Id No
15-62 Option Ordering No
Function:
Function:
View the LCP ID number.
Shows the ordering number for the installed op-
tions.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 135

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

15-63 Option Serial No 15-75 Slot C Option SW Version

Function: Function:
View the installed option serial number. View the software version for the option installed
in slot C.

15-70 Option in Slot A 15-76 Option in Slot 1

Function: Value:
View the type code string for the option installed 0-0 0
in slot A, and a translation of the type code string. Function:
E.g. for type code string ‘AX’ the translation is ‘No Displays the type code string for the option in slot
option’. C1. (CXXXX if no option) and the translation i.e.
>No option<.

15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 15-77 Slot C1 option SW Version

Function: Value:
View the software version for the option installed
0-0 0
in slot A.
Function:
Displays the software version for the installed op-
tion in option slot C.

15-72 Option in Slot B

Function: Parameter Info, 15-9*
View the type code string for the option installed Parameter lists
in slot B, and a translation of the type code string.
E.g. for type code string ‘BX’ the translation is ‘No
option’. 15-92 Defined Parameters

Array [1000]

Value:
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version
0 - 9999 0
Function:
Function:
View the software version for the option installed
View a list of all defined parameters in the fre-
in slot B.
quency converter. The list ends with 0.

15-74 Option in Slot C

15-93 Modified Parameters
Function:
View the type code string for the option installed Array [1000]
in slot C, and a translation of the type code string.
E.g. for type code string ‘CXXXX’ the translation is Value:
‘No option’. 0 - 9999 0
Function:
View a list of the parameters that have been
changed from their default setting. The list ends
with 0. Changes may not be visible until up to 30
seconds after implementation.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

136 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

15-99 Parameter Metadata

Array [30]

Value:
0 - 9999 0
Function:
This parameter contains data used by the MCT10
software tool.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 137

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Data Read-outs 16-05 Main Actual Value [%]

Value:
16-** Data Read-outs
-100.00% - 100.00% 0.00%
Parameter group for data read-outs, e.g. actual
references, voltages, control, alarm, warning and Function:
status words. View the two-byte word sent with the Status word
to the bus Master reporting the Main Actual Value.
16-0* General Status
Please refer to the VLT® AutomationDrive FC 300
Parameters for reading the general status, e.g. Profibus Operating Instructions MG.33.CX.YY for a
the calculated reference, the active control word, detailed description.
status.

16-00 Control Word 16-09 Custom Readout

Value: Value:
0 - FFFF 0 x.xx - x.xx unit 0.00 unit
Function: Function:
View the Control word sent from the frequency View the value of custom readout from par. 0-30
converter via the serial communication port in hex to par. 0-32
code.

16-1* Motor Status

16-01 Reference [Unit] Parameters for reading the motor status values.

Value:
16-10 Power [kW]
-999999.000 - 999999.000 0.000
Value:
Function:
0.0 - 1000.0 kW 0.0kW
View the present reference value applied on im-
pulse or analog basis in the unit resulting from the Function:
configuration selected in par. 1-00 (Hz, Nm or View the motor power in kW. The value shown is
RPM). calculated on the basis of the actual motor voltage
and motor current. The value is filtered, and
therefore approx. 1.3 seconds may pass from
16-02 Reference % when an input value changes to when the data
read-out values change.
Value:
-200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0%
Function: 16-11 Power [hp]
View the total reference. The total reference is the
Value:
sum of digital, analog, preset, bus, and freeze ref-
0.00 - 1000.00 hp 0.00hp
erences, plus catch-up and slow-down.
Function:
View the motor power in hp. The value shown is
16-03 Status Word calculated on the basis of the actual motor voltage
and motor current. The value is filtered, and
Value:
therefore approx. 1.3 seconds may pass from
0 - FFFF 0
when an input value changes to when the data
Function: read-out values change.
View the Status word sent from the frequency
converter via the serial communication port in hex
code.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

138 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

well as the motor used. The value is filtered, and

16-12 Motor Voltage thus approx. 1.3 seconds may pass from when an
Value: input changes value to when the data read-out
0.0 - 6000.0 V 0.0V values change.
Function:
View the motor voltage, a calculated value used
for controlling the motor. 16-17 Speed [RPM]
Value:
0 - 0 RPM 0 RPM
16-13 Motor Frequency Function:
Value: View the actual motor RPM. In open loop or closed
0.0 - 6500.0 Hz 0.0Hz loop process control the motor RPM is estimated.
Function: In speed closed loop modes the motor RPM is
View the motor frequency, without resonance measured.
dampening.

16-18 Motor Thermal

16-14 Motor Current Value:
Value: 0 - 100 % 0%
0.00 - 0.00 A 0.00A Function:
Function: View the calculated thermal load on the motor.
View the motor current measured as a mean val- The cut-out limit is 100%. The basis for calcula-
ue, IRMS. The value is filtered, and thus approx. tion is the ETR function selected in par.1-90.
1.3 seconds may pass from when an input value
changes to when the data read-out values
change. 16-19 KTY Sensor Temperature
Value:
0 - xxx °C 0°C
16-15 Frequency [%] Function:
Value: Returning the actual temperature on KTY sensor
0.00 - 0.00 % 0.00% buil into the motor.
Function: See par. 1-9*.
View a two-byte word reporting the actual motor
frequency (without resonance dampening) as a
percentage (scale 0000-4000 Hex) of par. 4-19 16-20 Motor Angle
Max. Output Frequency. Set par. 9-16 index 1 to Value:
send it with the Status Word instead of the MAV. 0 - 65535 0
Function:
View the current encoder/resolver angle offset
16-16 Torque relative to the index position. The value range of
Value: 0-65535 corresponds to 0-2*pi (radians).
-3000.0 - 3000.0 Nm 0.0Nm
Function:
View the torque value with sign, applied to the 16-22 Torque [%]
motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between 160% Value:
motor current and torque in relation to the rated -200 - 200% 0%
torque. Some motors supply more than 160% tor- Function:
que. Consequently, the min. value and the max. Value shown is the torque in percent of nominal
value will depend on the max. motor current as torque, with sign, applied to the motor shaft.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 139

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

16-3* Drive Status Function:

Parameters for reporting the status of the fre- View the inverter nominal current, which should
quency converter. match the nameplate data on the connected mo-
tor. The data are used for calculation of torque,
16-30 DC Link Voltage motor protection, etc.
Value:
0 - 10000 V 0V
16-37 Inv. Max. Current
Function:
View a measured value. The value is filtered, and Value:
thus approx. 1.3 seconds may pass from when an 0.01 - 10000.00 A A
input value changes to when the data read-out Function:
value changes. View the inverter maximum current, which should
match the nameplate data on the connected mo-
tor. The data are used for calculation of torque,
16-32 Brake Energy /s motor protection, etc.
Value:
0.000 - 0.000 kW 0.000kW
16-38 SL Controller State
Function:
View the brake power transmitted to an external Value:
brake resistor, stated as an instantaneous value. 0 - 100 0
Function:
View the state of the event under execution by the
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min SL controller.
Value:
0.000 - 500.000 kW 0.000kW
16-39 Control Card Temp.
Function:
View the brake power transmitted to an external Value:
brake resistor. The mean power is calculated on 0 - 100 °C 0°C
an average basis for the most recent 120 seconds. Function:
View the temperature on the control card, stated
in °C.
16-34 Heatsink Temp.
Value:
0 - 255 °C 0°C 16-40 Logging Buffer Full

Function: Value:
View the frequency converter heatsink tempera- No [0]
ture. The cut-out limit is 90 ± 5 °C, and the motor Yes [1]
cuts back in at 60 ± 5 °C.
Function:
View whether the logging buffer is full (see par.
16-35 Inverter Thermal 15-1*). The logging buffer will never be full when
Value: par. 15-13 Logging Mode is set to Log always [0].
0-0% 0%
Function: 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
View the percentage load on the inverter. Parameters for reporting the reference and feed-
back input.

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current 16-50 External Reference

Value: Value:
0.01 - 10000.00 A A -200.0 - 200.0 0.0

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

140 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Bit 0 Digital input term. 33

Bit 1 Digital input term. 32
View the total reference, the sum of digital, ana-
Bit 2 Digital input term. 29
log, preset, bus and freeze references, plus catch- Bit 3 Digital input term. 27
up and slow-down. Bit 4 Digital input term. 19
Bit 5 Digital input term. 18
Bit 6 Digital input term. 37
16-51 Pulse Reference Bit 7 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/2
Bit 8 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/3
Value: Bit 9 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4
-200 - 200 0.0 Bit 10-63 Reserved for future terminals
Function:
View the reference value from programmed digital
input(s). The read-out can also reflect the impul- 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
ses from an incremental encoder. Value:
Current [0]
Voltage [1]
16-52 Feedback [Unit]
Value: Function:
-999999.999 - 999999.999 0.0 View the setting of input terminal 53. Current =
0; Voltage = 1.
Function:
View the feedback unit resulting from the selec-
tion of unit and scaling in par. 3-00, 3-01, 3-02
16-62 Analog Input 53
and 3-03.
Value:
-20.000 - 20.000 0.000
16-53 Digi Pot Reference Function:
Value: View the actual value at input 53.
-200 - 200 0.0
Function:
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting
View the contribution of the Digital Potentiometer
to the actual reference. Value:
Current [0]

16-6* Inputs and Outputs Voltage [1]

Parameters for reporting the digital and analog IO

Function:
ports.
View the setting of input terminal 54. Current =
0; Voltage = 1.
16-60 Digital Input
Value:
0 - 63 0
Function:
View the signal states from the active digital in-
puts. Input 18 corresponds to the bit at the far
left. ‘0’ = no signal, ‘1’ = connected signal.

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 141

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function:
16-64 Analog Input 54
View the actual value of pulses at terminal 29 in
Value: digital output mode.
-20.000 - 20.000 0.000 This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
Function:
View the actual value at input 54.
16-71 Relay Output [bin]
Value:
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 - 31 0
Value: Function:
0.000 - 30.000 0.000 View the settings of all relays.
Function:
View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The val-
ue shown reflects the selection in par. 06-50.

16-66 Digital Output [bin]

Value:
0 - 115 0
Function: 16-72 Counter A
View the binary value of all digital outputs. Value:
-2147483648 -2147483647 0
Function:
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
View the present value of Counter A. Counters are
Value: useful as comparator operands, see par. 13-10.
0-0 0 The value can be reset or changed either via dig-
Function: ital inputs (parameter group 5-1*) or by using an
View the actual frequency rate on terminal 29. SLC action (par. 13-52).
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

16-73 Counter B
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] Value:
Value: -2147483648 -2147483647 0
0 - 130000 0 Function:
Function: View the present value of Counter B. Counters are
View the actual value of the frequency applied at useful as comparator operands (par. 13-10).
terminal 33 as an impulse input. The value can be reset or changed either via dig-
ital inputs (parameter group 5-1*) or by using an
SLC action (par. 13-52).
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Value:
0 - 40000 0 16-74 Precise Stop Counter

Function: Value:
View the actual value of pulses applied to terminal 0 - 2147483647 0
27 in digital output mode. Function:
Returns the actual counter value of precise coun-
ter (par. 1-84).
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
Value:
0 - 40000 0

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

142 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

16-75 Analog In X30/11 Function:

Value: View the extended fieldbus comm. option status
0.000 - 0.000 0.000 word.
Function: For more information please refer to the relevant
View the actual value at input X30/11 of MCB 101. fieldbus manual.

16-76 Analog In X30/12 16-85 FC Port CTW 1

Value: Value:
0.000 - 0.000 0 - 65535 0
0.000
Function: Function:
View the actual value at input X30/12 of MCB 101. View the two-byte Control word (CTW) received
from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the control
word depends on the fieldbus option installed and
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 16-77 [mA] the Control word profile selected in par. 8-10.

Value:
0.000 - 0.000 0.000
16-86 FC Port REF 1
Function:
Value:
View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.
0-0 0
Function:
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
View the two-byte Status word (STW) sent to the
Parameters for reporting the BUS references and Bus-Master. Interpretation of the Status word de-
control words. pends on the fieldbus option installed and the
Control word profile selected in par. 8-10.
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
Value:
16-9* Diagnosis Read-Out
0 - 65535 0
Parameters displaying alarm, warning and exten-
Function: ded status words.
View the two-byte Control word (CTW) received
from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the Control 16-90 Alarm Word
word depends on the fieldbus option installed and
Value:
the Control word profile selected in par. 8-10.
0 - FFFF 0
For more information please refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual. Function:
View the alarm word sent via the serial commu-
nication port in hex code.
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1
Value:
16-92 Warning Word
-200 - 200 0
Value:
Function:
0 - FFFF 0
View the two-byte word sent with the control word
form the Bus-Master to set the reference value. Function:
For more information please refer to the relevant View the warning word sent via the serial com-
fieldbus manual. munication port in hex code.

16-84 Comm. Option STW 16-93 Warning Word 2

Value: Value:
0 - 65535 0 - FFFF 0
0

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 143

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function:
View the warning word sent via the serial com-
munication port in hex code.

16-94 Ext. Status Word

Value:
0 - FFFF 0
Function:
Returns the extended warning word sent via the
serial communication port in hex code.

144 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameters: Encoder Input Function:

Select HIPERFACE [1] if the encoder is absolute
17-** Motor Feedb. Option only.
Additional parameters to configure the Encoder Select None [0] if the feedback sensor is an in-
(MCB102) or the Resolver (MCB103) Feedback cremental encoder only.
Option. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.
17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
Parameters in this group configure the incremen-
tal interface of the MCB102 option. Note that both 17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev)
the incremental and absolute interfaces are active
Value:
at the same time.
512 [512]

17-10 Signal Type 1024 [1024]

Value: 2048 [2048]

None [0] 4096 [4096]

RS422 (5V TTL/linedrv.) [1] SSI 4 - 8192 [8192]

Sinusoidal 1Vpp [2] 16384 [16384]

HIPERFACE 512 - 32768 [32768]
Function:
Select the incremental type (A/B channel) of the Function:
encoder in use. Find the information on the en- Select the resolution of the absolute encoder, i.e.
coder data sheet. the number of counts per revolution.
Select None [0] if the feedback sensor is an ab- This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
solute encoder only. tor is running. The value depends on setting in
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- par. 17-20.
tor is running.

17-24 SSI Data Length

17-11 Resolution (PPR) Value:
Value: 13 - 25 13
10 - 10000 1024 Function:
Function: Set the number of bits for the SSI telegram.
Enter the resolution of the incremental track, i.e. Choose 13 bits for single-turn encoders and 25
the number of pulses or periods per revolution. bits for multi-turn encoder.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.
17-25 Clock Rate

17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface Value:

Parameters in this group configure the absolute 100 - 260 kHz 260kHz
interface of the MCB102 option. Note that both the Function:
incremental and absolute interfaces are active at Set the SSI clock rate. With long encoder cables
the same time. the clock rate must be reduced.

17-20 Protocol Selection

Value: 17-26 SSI Data Format

None [0] Value:

HIPERFACE [1] Gray Code [0]

EnDat [2] Binary Code [1]

SSI [4]

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 145

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Function: Function:
Set the data format of the SSI data. Choose be- Set the input frequency to the resolver.
tween Gray or Binary format. The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers.

17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate 17-53 Resolver Transformation Ratio

Value: Value:
600 [0] 0.1 - 1.1 0.5
1200 [1] Function:
2400 [2] Set the transformation ratio for the resolver.
4800 [3] The transformation ration is:

9600 [4] VOut

Tratio =
19200 [5] VI n
38400 [6] The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers.

Function:
Select the baud rate of the attached encoder. 17-59 Resolver Interface
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo- Value:
tor is running. The parameter is only accessible
Disabled [0]
when par. 17-20 is set to HIPERFACE [1].
Enabled [1]

17-5* Resolver Interface Function:

Parameter group 17-5* is used for setting param- Activate the MCB 103 resolver option when the
eters for the MCB 103 Resolver Option. resolver parameters are selected.
Usually the resolver feedback is used as motor To avoid damage to resolvers par. 17-50 – par.
feedback from Permanent Magnet motors with 17-53 must be adjusted before activating this pa-
par. 1-01 set to Flux with motor feedback. rameter.
Resolver parameters cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running. 17-6* Monitoring and Application
This parameter group is for selecting additional
17-50 Resolver Poles
functions when MCB 102 Encoder option or MCB
Value: 103 Resolver option is fitted into option slot B as
2-2 2 speed feedback.
Function: Monitoring and Application parameters cannot be
Set the number of poles on the resolver. adjusted while the motor is running.
The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers.
17-60 Encoder Positive Direction
Value:
17-51 Resolver Input Voltage *Clockwise [0]
Value: Counter clockwise [1]
4.0 - 8.0 V 7.0V
Function: Function:
Set the input voltage to the resolver. The voltage Change the detected encoder rotation direction
is stated as RMS value. without changing the wiring to the encoder.
The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers This parameter cannot be adjusted while the mo-
tor is running.

17-52 Resolver Input Frequency

Value:
2.0 - 15.0 kHz 10.0kHz

factory setting () display text [] value for use in communication via serial communication port

146 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

17-61 Encoder Signal Monitoring

Value:
Disabled [0]
Warning [1]
Trip [2]

Function:
Select which reaction the frequency converter
should take in case a faulty encoder signal is de-
tected.
The encoder function in par. 17-61 is an electrical
check of the hardware circuit in the encoder sys-
tem.

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 147

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Parameter Lists
FC Series
All = valid for FC 301 and FC 302 series
01 = valid for FC 301 only
02 = valid for FC 302 only
Changes during operation
”TRUE” means that the parameter can be changed while the frequency converter is in operation and
“FALSE” means that the frequency converter must be stopped before a change can be made.
4-Set-up
'All set-ups': the parameter can be set individually in each of the four set-ups, i. e. one single parameter
can have four different data values.
’1 set-up’: data value will be the same in all set-ups.
Conversion index
This number refers to a conversion figure used when writing or reading by means of a frequency con-
verter.

Conv. index 100 67 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

Conv. factor 1 1/60 1000000 100000 10000 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

Data type Description Type

2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible String VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD

148 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

0-** Operation/Display

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
Operating State at Power-up [1] Forced stop,
0-04 (Hand) ref=old All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Readout: Edit Set-ups /
0-14 Channel 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1617 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1610 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1602 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu SR 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
Unit for User-defined Read-
0-30 out [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min Value of User-defined
0-31 Readout 0.00 All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
Max Value of User-defined
0-32 Readout 100.00 All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
Access to Main Menu w/o
0-61 Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Quick Menu Password 200 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
Access to Quick Menu w/o
0-66 Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 149

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

1-** Load/Motor

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-01 Motor Control Principle All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source [1] 24V encoder All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-03 Torque Characteristics [0] Constant torque All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-04 Overload Mode [0] High torque All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-05 Local Mode Configuration [2] As mode par 1-00 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-1* Motor Selection
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] SR All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed SR All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque SR All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
Automatic Motor Adaptation
1-29 (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
Stator Leakage Reactance
1-33 (X1) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
Rotor Leakage Reactance
1-34 (X2) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) SR All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) SR All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM SR All set-ups x FALSE 0 Uint16
1-41 Motor Angle Offset 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
Motor Magnetisation at Zero
1-50 Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetis-
1-51 ing [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetis-
1-52 ing [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-53 Model Shift Frequency SR All set-ups x FALSE -1 Uint16
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

150 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
Low Speed Load Compensa-
1-60 tion 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
High Speed Load Compensa-
1-61 tion 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Slip Compensation Time Con-
1-63 stant 0.10 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Dampening 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Resonance Dampening Time
1-65 Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed 100 % All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint8
1-67 Load Type [0] Passive load All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-68 Minimum Inertia SR All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-69 Maximum Inertia SR All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-71 Start Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-72 Start Function [2] Coast/delay time All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-73 Flying Start [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min Speed for Function at
1-81 Stop [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min Speed for Function at
1-82 Stop [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-83 Precise Stop Function [0] Precise ramp stop All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value 100000 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Precise Stop Speed Compen-
1-85 sation Delay 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [0] No protection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
1-93 Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-95 KTY Sensor Type [0] KTY Sensor 1 All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-97 KTY Threshold level 80 °C 1 set-up x TRUE 100 Int16

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 151

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

2-** Brakes

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # - Size Related) only during sion
operation index
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-2* Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-23 Activate Brake Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8

152 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

3-** Reference / Ramps

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # (SR - Size Rela- only during sion
ted) operation index
3-0* Reference Limits
3-00 Reference Range All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-02 Minimum Reference SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
[0] Linked to
3-13 Reference Site Hand / Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference Resource 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-16 Reference Resource 2 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-17 Reference Resource 3 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Relative Scaling Reference Re-
3-18 source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-45 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-46 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-47 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-48 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-5* Ramp 2
3-50 Ramp 2 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp up Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-55 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-56 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-57 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-58 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 153

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # - Size Related) only during sion
operation index
3-6* Ramp 3
3-60 Ramp 3 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-65 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-66 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-67 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-68 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-7* Ramp 4
3-70 Ramp 4 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-75 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-76 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-77 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-78 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time SR 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay 1.000 All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

154 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

4-** Limits / Warnings

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode 160.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency 132.0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-2* Limit Factors
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-3* Motor Fb Monitor
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function [2] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout 0.05 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-53 Warning Speed High (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-56 Warning Feedback Low -999999.999 All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-57 Warning Feedback High 999999.999 All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 155

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

5-** Digital In/Out

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conv- Type
No. # Size Related) only during er-
opera- sion
tion index
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Val-
5-53 ue SR All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups x FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Val-
5-58 ue SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
Terminal 27 Pulse Output Vari-
5-60 able All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Terminal 29 Pulse Output Vari-
5-63 able All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 SR All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
5-66 Variable All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-7* 24V Encoder Input
Term 32/33 Pulses per Revolu-
5-70 tion 1024 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups x TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up x TRUE -2 Uint16

156 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

6-** Analog In/Out

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # - Size Related) only during sion
operation index
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 1
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Val-
6-14 ue SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
6-15 Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-2* Analog Input 2
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Val-
6-24 ue SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
6-25 Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-3* Analog Input 3
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb.
6-34 Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb.
6-35 Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/11 Filter Time Con-
6-36 stant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-4* Analog Input 4
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb.
6-44 Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb.
6-45 Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/12 Filter Time Con-
6-46 stant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-5* Analog Output 1
6-50 Terminal 42 Output All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal 42 Output Timeout Pre-
6-54 set 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-6* Analog Output 2
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 157

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

7-** Controllers

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. - Size Related) only during sion
# operation index
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time SR All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time SR All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time 10.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
Process PID Normal/ Inverse
7-30 Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 0.01 All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 10000.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

158 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

8-** Comm. and Options

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. only during sion
# operation index
8-0* General Settings
[0] Digital and
8-01 Control Site ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Word Source All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 1.0 s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Word Timeout Function [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
8-10 Control Word Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [1] Profile Default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address 1 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate [2] 9600 Baud 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay 5000 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay 25 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
[1] Standard tele-
8-40 Telegram selection gram 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-9* Bus Jog
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 200 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 159

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

9-** Profibus

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. Size Related) only during sion
# operation index
9-00 Setpoint 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-07 Actual Value 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-15 PCD Write Configuration SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-16 PCD Read Configuration SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-22 Telegram Selection [108] PPO 8 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
[1] Enable cyclic
9-28 Process Control master 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
9-31 Safe Address 0 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 Profibus Warning Word 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
[255] No baudrate
9-63 Actual Baud Rate found All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-65 Profile Number 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[2]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-68 Status Word 1 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-71 Profibus Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-81 Defined Parameters (2) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-82 Defined Parameters (3) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-83 Defined Parameters (4) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-84 Defined Parameters (5) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-91 Changed Parameters (2) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-92 Changed Parameters (3) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-93 Changed parameters (4) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-94 Changed parameters (5) 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-99 Profibus Revision Counter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

160 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

10-** CAN Fieldbus

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # (SR - Size Rela- only during sion
ted) operation index
10-0* Common Settings
10-00 CAN Protocol 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
10-01 Baud Rate Select 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-02 MAC ID SR 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-1* DeviceNet
10-10 Process Data Type Selection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-11 Process Data Config Write SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-12 Process Data Config Read SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-13 Warning Parameter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-14 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-15 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-2* COS Filters
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-21 COS Filter 2 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-22 COS Filter 3 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-23 COS Filter 4 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-3* Parameter Access
10-30 Array Index 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-31 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-32 Devicenet Revision SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-33 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
10-34 DeviceNet Product Code SR 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
10-39 Devicenet F Parameters 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
10-5* CANopen
10-50 Process Data Config Write. SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-51 Process Data Config Read. SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 161

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

13-** Smart Logic

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00 SL Controller Mode 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-01 Start Event 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value SR 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer SR 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

162 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

14-** Special Functions

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern [1] SFAVM All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-2* Trip Reset
14-20 Reset Mode [0] Manual reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
Current Lim Cont, Proportional
14-30 Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Current Lim Contr, Integration
14-31 Time 0.020 s All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation 40 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 10 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up x FALSE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 2.0 uF 1 set-up FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter 7.000 mH 1 set-up FALSE -6 Uint16

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 163

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

15-** Drive Information

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # - Size Related) only during sion
operation index
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temp's 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Reset Running Hours
15-07 Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval SR 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-3* Fault Log
15-30 Fault Log: Error Code 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-31 Fault Log: Value 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Fault Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
Frequency Converter Or-
15-46 dering No 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
Frequency Converter Seri-
15-51 al Number 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0 Option SW Version 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1 Option SW Version 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

164 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

16-** Data Readouts

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-01 Reference [Unit] 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0.0 % All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-09 Custom Readout 0.00 All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0.00 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0.00 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0.0 V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0.0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor Current 0.00 A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0.0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-19 KTY sensor temperature 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Int16
16-20 Motor Angle 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 165

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # only during sion
operation index
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0.0 All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-51 Pulse Reference 0.0 All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-52 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0.00 All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz] 0 All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0.000 All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

166 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

17-** Motor Feedb.Option

Par. Parameter description Default value (SR - 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # Size Related) only during sion
operation index
17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
17-10 Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-11 Resolution (PPR) 1024 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface
17-20 Protocol Selection [0] None All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev) SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-24 SSI Data Length 13 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
17-25 Clock Rate SR All set-ups FALSE 3 Uint16
17-26 SSI Data Format [0] Gray code All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-5* Resolver Interface
17-50 Poles 2 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
17-51 Input Voltage 7.0 V 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-52 Input Frequency 10.0 kHz 1 set-up FALSE 2 Uint8
17-53 Transformation Ratio 0.5 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-59 Resolver Interface [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-6* Monitoring and App.
17-60 Feedback Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 167

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

32-** MCO Basic Settings

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # only during sion
operation index
32-0* Encoder 2
32-00 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-01 Incremental Resolution 1024 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-02 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-03 Absolute Resolution 8192 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-05 Absolute Encoder Data Length 25 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Absolute Encoder Clock Fre-
32-06 quency 262.000 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Absolute Encoder Clock Genera-
32-07 tion [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-08 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-09 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-10 Rotational Direction [1] No action 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-11 User Unit Denominator 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-12 User Unit Numerator 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-3* Encoder 1
32-30 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-31 Incremental Resolution 1024 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-32 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-33 Absolute Resolution 8192 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-35 Absolute Encoder Data Length 25 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Absolute Encoder Clock Fre-
32-36 quency 262.000 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Absolute Encoder Clock Genera-
32-37 tion [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-38 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-39 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-40 Encoder Termination [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-6* PID Controller
32-60 Proportional factor 30 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-61 Derivative factor 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-62 Integral factor 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-63 Limit Value for Integral Sum 1000 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-64 PID Bandwidth 1000 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-65 Velocity Feed-Forward 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-66 Acceleration Feed-Forward 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error 20000 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
[0] Reversing al-
32-68 Reverse Behavior for Slave lowed 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-69 Sampling Time for PID Control 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
32-70 Scan Time for Profile Generator 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
Size of the Control Window (Ac-
32-71 tivation) 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Size of the Control Window (De-
32-72 activ.) 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-8* Velocity & Accel.
32-80 Maximum Velocity (Encoder) 1500 RPM 2 set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
32-81 Shortest Ramp 1.000 s 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-82 Ramp Type [0] Linear 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-83 Velocity Resolution 100 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-84 Default Velocity 50 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-85 Default Acceleration 50 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

For a detailed description of par. 32-xx, 33-xx and 34-xx, please refer to the MCO 305 Design Guide/
Manual

168 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

33-** MCO Adv. Settings

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # only during sion
operation index
33-0* Home Motion
33-00 Force HOME [0] Home not forced 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Zero Point Offset from Home
33-01 Pos. 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-02 Ramp for Home Motion 10 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-03 Velocity of Home Motion 10 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-04 Behaviour during HomeMotion [0] Revers and index 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-1* Synchronization
Synchronization Factor Master
33-10 (M:S) 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Synchronization Factor Slave
33-11 (M:S) 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Position Offset for Synchroniza-
33-12 tion 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Accuracy Window for Position
33-13 Sync. 1000 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-14 Relative Slave Velocity Limit 0% 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-15 Marker Number for Master 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-16 Marker Number for Slave 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-17 Master Marker Distance 4096 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-18 Slave Marker Distance 4096 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
[0] Encoder Z posi-
33-19 Master Marker Type tive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
[0] Encoder Z posi-
33-20 Slave Marker Type tive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Master Marker Tolerance Win-
33-21 dow 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-22 Slave Marker Tolerance Window 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Start Behaviour for Marker
33-23 Sync [0] Start Function 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
33-24 Marker Number for Fault 10 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-25 Marker Number for Ready 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-26 Velocity Filter 0 us 2 set-ups TRUE -6 Int32
33-27 Offset Filter Time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
33-28 Marker Filter Configuration [0] Marker filter 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-29 Filter Time for Marker Filter 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
33-30 Maximum Marker Correction 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-31 Synchronisation Type [0] Standard 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-4* Limit Handling
[0] Call error han-
33-40 Behaviour atEnd Limit Switch dler 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-41 Negative Software End Limit -500000 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-42 Positive Software End Limit 500000 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Negative Software End Limit
33-43 Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Positive Software End Limit Ac-
33-44 tive [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-45 Time in Target Window 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
33-46 Target Window LimitValue 1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-47 Size of Target Window 0 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 169

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # only during sion
operation index
33-5* I/O Configuration
33-50 Terminal X57/1 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-51 Terminal X57/2 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-52 Terminal X57/3 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-53 Terminal X57/4 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-54 Terminal X57/5 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-55 Terminal X57/6 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-56 Terminal X57/7 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-57 Terminal X57/8 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-58 Terminal X57/9 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-59 Terminal X57/10 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-60 Terminal X59/1 and X59/2 Mode [1] Output 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
33-61 Terminal X59/1 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-62 Terminal X59/2 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-63 Terminal X59/1 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-64 Terminal X59/2 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-65 Terminal X59/3 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-66 Terminal X59/4 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-67 Terminal X59/5 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-68 Terminal X59/6 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-69 Terminal X59/7 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-70 Terminal X59/8 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-8* Global Parameters
33-80 Activated Program Number -1 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
33-81 Power-up State [1] Motor on 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-82 Drive Status Monitoring [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-83 Behaviour afterError [0] Coast 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-84 Behaviour afterEsc. [0] Controlled stop 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
MCO Supplied by External
33-85 24VDC [0] No 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

For a detailed description of par. 32-xx, 33-xx and 34-xx, please refer to the MCO 305 Design Guide/
Manual

170 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
How to Programme

34-** MCO Data Readouts

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # only during sion
operation index
34-0* PCD Write Par.
34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-02 PCD 2 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-03 PCD 3 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-04 PCD 4 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-05 PCD 5 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-06 PCD 6 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-07 PCD 7 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-08 PCD 8 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-09 PCD 9 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-10 PCD 10 Write to MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-2* PCD Read Par.
34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-22 PCD 2 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-23 PCD 3 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-24 PCD 4 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-25 PCD 5 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-26 PCD 6 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-27 PCD 7 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-28 PCD 8 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-29 PCD 9 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-30 PCD 10 Read from MCO 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-4* Inputs & Outputs
34-40 Digital Inputs 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-41 Digital Outputs 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-5* Process Data
34-50 Actual Position 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-51 Commanded Position 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-52 Actual Master Position 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-53 Slave Index Position 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-54 Master Index Position 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-55 Curve Position 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-56 Track Error 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-57 Synchronizing Error 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-58 Actual Velocity 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-59 Actual Master Velocity 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-60 Synchronizing Status 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-61 Axis Status 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-62 Program Status 0 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-7* Diagnosis readouts
34-70 MCO Alarm Word 1 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
34-71 MCO Alarm Word 2 0 All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

For a detailed description of par. 32-xx, 33-xx and 34-xx, please refer to the MCO 305 Design Guide/
Manual

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 171

FC 300 Programming Guide

Index

Coast 46
Coasting 5
2 Coasting 14
24 V Encoder 38 Coasting 99
Configurable Status Word Stw, 8-13 98
A Configuration Mode 37
Abbreviations 1 Control Word Timeout Function 96
Access To Quick Menu W/o Password 37 Cooling 49
Active Set-up 28 Counter Clockwise 67
Actual Typecode String, 15-45 135 Current Lim Cont, 14-30 129
Alarm Word 98 Current Lim Contr, Int. Time, 14-31 129
Analog Inputs 6
Analog Inputs 6 D
Automatic Motor Adaptation (ama) 40 Data Log Settings, 15-1* 132
Automatic Restart Time, 14-21 127 D-axis Inductance (ld) 41
Dc Brake 52
B Dc Brake 46
Back Emf At 1000 Rpm 43 Dc Brake 99
Baud Rate 25 Dc Braking Time 52
Brake Check 53 Dc Hold 52
Brake Current 55 Dc Hold 46
Brake Power 53 Dc Hold 46
Brake Power 53 Dc Hold 47
Brake Power 7 Dc Link Voltage 140
Brake Power Monitoring 53 Default Settings 1
Brake Resistor (ohm) 2-11 53 Default Settings 148
Break-away Torque 6 Defined Parameters, 15-92 136
Bus Jog 2 Speed 101 Definitions 1
Bus Password Access 37 Devicenet And Can Fieldbus 107
Devicenet F Parameters 10-39 111
C Display Line 2 Large 33
Catch Up 74 Display Line 3 Large, 0-24 33
Catch Up/slow Down Value 58 Display Mode 1
Changing A Data Value 1 Display Mode - Selection Of Read-outs 1
Changing A Group Of Numeric Data Values 1 Drive Identification, 15-4* 134
Changing A Text Value 1 Drive Information 131
Changing Data 1 Drive Ordering Number, 15-46 135
Clockwise 67 Drive Serial No, 15-51 135
Clockwise 84
Clockwise 146 E
Clockwise 46 Electronic Terminal Relay 50
Clockwise 47 Encoder Positive Direction 146

172 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
Index

Encoder Pulses 84 Jog Ramp Time 65

Encoder Signal Monitoring 147 Jog Speed 58
End-of-timeout Function 97 Jog Speed 59
Environment, 14-5* 130
Etr 49 K
Etr 139 Kwh Counter, 15-02 131
Ext. Status Word 144
External Reference 140
L
Language 27
F Language Package 1 27
Fan Monitor, 14-53 130 Language Package 2 27
Fault Log, 15-3* 134 Language Package 3 27
Fault Log: Error Code 134 Language Package 4 27
Fault Log: Time, 15-32 134 Lcp 5
Fault Log: Value, 15-31 134 Lcp 7
Flying Start 47 Lcp 1
Freeze Output 5 Lcp 14
Freq. Input #29 [hz] 142 Lcp 23
Freq. Input #33 [hz] 142 Lcp 102 11
Function At Stop 47 Lcp Copy 36
Lcp Id No 135
G Lcp Id No, 15-48 135
General Warning 3 Lcp Keypad, 0-4* 35
Graphical Display 11 Leds 11
Load Type 46
H Local Control Keys 1
Heatsink Temp. 140 Local Reference 28
Hist. Log: Time, 15-22 134 Logging Interval, 15-11 132
Hist. Log: Value, 15-21 134 Logging Mode, 15-13 133
Historic Log,15-2* 133
Historic Log: Event, 15-20 133 M
Main Menu 17
I Main Menu Mode 1
Incremental Encoder 141 Main Menu Mode 13
Indexed Parameters 1 Main Reactance 40
Indicator Lights 12 Main Reactance (xh) 41
Infinitely Variable Change Of Numeric Data Mains Failure 126
Value 1
Mains Rfi Filter Circuit 130
Initialisation 1
Mains Supply 9
Inverter Switching, 14-0* 125
Mains Voltage At Mains Fault 126
Iron Loss Resistance (rfe) 41
Max Output Frequency 68
It Mains 130
Maximum Inertia 46
Maximum Limit 66
J
Maximum Reference 57
Jog 5
Min. Frequency For Function At Stop, 1-81 48

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 173

FC 300 Programming Guide
Index

Min. Speed For Function At Stop [hz], 1-82 48 Output Speed 47

Minimum Aeo Frequency, 14-42 129 Over Temps, 15-04 131
Minimum Inertia 46 Over Volts, 15-05 131
Minimum Limit 66 Over-voltage Control 54
Minimum Magnetisation, 14-41 129
Missing Motor Phase Function 70 P
Modified Parameters, 15-93 136 Parameter Access 110
Motor Angle Offset 43 Parameter Info, 15-9* 136
Motor Cont. Rated Torque 40 Parameter Selection 1
Motor Current 39 Parameter Set-up 1
Motor Feedback 37 Passive Load 46
Motor Frequency 39 Power Card Ordering No, 15-47 135
Motor Frequency 139 Power Card Serial No, 15-53 135
Motor Nominal Speed 39 Power Restore 66
Motor Poles 42 Power Ups, 15-03 131
Motor Power 39 Precise Stop 48
Motor Power [hp] 39 Precise Stop Counter 142
Motor Protection 49 Precise Stop Function 48
Motor Speed High Limit [hz], 4-14 67 Pre-magnetizing 47
Motor Speed Unit 27 Preset Reference 57
Motor Thermal Protection 49 Preset Reference Select 100
Motor Voltage 39 Profibus Warning Word 104
Motor Voltage 139 Proportionalgain 92
Pulse Reference 141
N Pwm Random, 14-04 125
Net Control 10-15 109
Net Reference 10-14 109 Q
Normal Torque 38 Quick Menu 13
Numerical Local Control Panel 1 Quick Menu 13
Quick Menu 1
O Quick Menu Mode 13
Operating Hours, 15-00 131 Quick Menu Mode 17
Operating Mode 28 Quick Menu Password 36
Operating State At Power-up (hand) 28 Quick Stop Ramp Time 65
Operation Mode 127 Quick Stop Select 99
Option Ident. 15-6* 135 Quick Transfer Of Parameter Settings Be-
tween Multiple Frequency Converters 1
Option In Slot A, 15-70 136
Option In Slot B, 15-72 136
R
Option In Slot C, 15-74 136
Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 61
Option Mounted, 15-60 135
Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time 60
Option Ordering No, 15-62 135
Ramp 1 Type 60
Option Serial No, 15-63 135
Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time 62
Option Sw Version, 15-61 135
Ramp 3 Ramp Down Time 63
Ordered Type Code String, 15-44 135
Ramp 3 Ramp Up Time 63
Output Filter, 14-55 130

174 MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

FC 300 Programming Guide
Index

Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time 64 Sw Version, 15-43 135

Ramp Delay 66 Switching Frequency 125
Ramp Time 66
Rated Motor Speed 5 T
Rcd 8 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction 84
Reference Source 1 59 Term. 29 Low Frequency 81
Regional Settings 28 Terminal 53 High Current 87
Relative Scaling Reference Source 59 Terminal 53 Low Current 87
Relay Outputs 77 Terminal 54 High Current 87
Reset 14 Terminal 54 Low Current 87
Reset Control Word Timeout 97 Thermal Load 43
Reset Kwh Counter, 15-06 131 Thermal Load 139
Reset Mode, 14-20 127 Thermistor 8
Reset] Key On Lcp 35 Thermistor 49
Rfi, 14-50 130 Torque Limit Generator Mode 68
Rotor Leakage Reactance (x2) 41 Trip Delay At Torque Limit 128
Rotor Resistance (rr) 41 Trip Reset, 14-2* 127
Running Hours, 15-01 131
V
S Variable Torque 38
Serial Communication 6 Vt Level, 14-40 129
Sl Control Mode, 13-00 112 Vvcplus 8
Slot A Option Sw Version, 15-71 136 Vvcplus 37
Slot B Option Sw Version, 15-73 136
Slot C Option Sw Version, 15-75 136
W
Warning Word 143
Special Functions 125
Warning Word 2 143
Speed Pid Feed Forward Factor 93
Speed Pid Lowpass Filter Time 93
Start Delay 46
Start Delay 46
Start Function 46
Start Function 46
Start Speed [hz] 47
Start Speed [rpm] 47
Stator Leakage Reactance 40
Stator Leakage Reactance (x1) 41
Stator Resistance (rs) 41
Status 12
Status Messages 11
Step Size 66
Step-by-step 1
Store Always 10-33 110
Store Data Values 10-31 110
Sw Id Control Card, 15-49 135
Sw Id Power Card, 15-50 135

MG.33.M1.02 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 175